IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) Z fc 1.0 I.I 1.25 |S0 "■■ 11 Ili4 ^ Illlli4 Photographic Sciences Corporation s. '^ 4 \ V \\ "% 4> ^ 4^<> 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 873-4503 >> o ^^^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microrsproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. n Coloured covers/ Couverture da coulaur [~~1 Covers damaged/ n n a □ Couverture endommagike Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^e et/ou pellicul^e r~l Cover title missing/ D Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ CartBS gAographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ ReliA avec d'autres documents Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distorsion le long de la marge int6rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela itait possible, ces pages n'ont pas iti filmies. Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppldmentaires: L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduita. ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mithode normale de filmage sont indiquAs ci-dessous. □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur □ Pages damaged/ Pages endommag^es r~~| Pages restored and/or laminated/ D Pages restauries et/ou pelliculdes Pages discoloured, stained or foxe< Pages d^colordes, tachet^es ou piquees Pages detached/ Pages ditachees Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Quality in^gale de I'impression Includes supplementary materii Comprend du materiel supplementaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible |~~| Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ I "I Showthrough/ l~n Quality of print varies/ nn Includes supplementary material/ ^~~^ Only edition available/ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc.. have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure. etc.. cnt it6 film^es d nouveau de facon a obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est filmi au taux de reduction indiqui ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X y 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X •"^'mm^' The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: Seminary of Quebec Library L'exemplaire filmi fut reproduit grdce d la ginArositi de: Stminaire de Quebec Bibiiothique The images appearing here are the bast quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Las images suivantas ont 6t6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin. compte tenu de la condition et de la nettet6 de rexemplaire filmA. et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Original copies in printed ppper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. Les exemplcires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimAe sont fiimis en commen9ant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la derniire page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression cu d'illustration. soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont film6s en commen^ant par la premiire page qui conr.porte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la darniire page qui comporte une telle empreinte. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol —»•( meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "ENC"^ whichever applies. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernlAre image de chaque microfiche, seion le cas: le symbole —^ signifie "A SUIVRE ". le symbole V signifie "FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc.. may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre film6s A des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un seul clich6. il est filmi A partir da I'angle supArieur gauche, de gaucne & droite. et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mAthode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 / A GEAMMAR OF THB CREE LANGUAGE; WITB WHICH la COMBINED ' AN ANALYSIS . ,^, CHIPPEWAY DIAi ''' OF THE By JOSEPH HOWSE, Esq. F.R.G.S. AND RESIDBNT TWENTY YEABS IN PRINCE RUPBRT's LAND, IN TH»t SERVICE OP THE HON. HUDSON's BAY COMPANY. LONDON: J. G. F. & J. RIVINGTON, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH YARD, AND WATERLOO PLACE, FALL HALL. 1844. 0IRBNCB8TER ; PRINTED BY THOMAS PHILIP BAILY, Columbian Press. 8e: I TO THE NOBLEMEN AND GENTLEMEN ^^\ CP THE ROYAL GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY, AHD OP THE CHURCH-MISSIONARY SOCIETY, DESIGNED TO FACILITATE THE COMMUNICATION ■ * ' ' '•' - CHRISTIANITY AND USEFUL KNOWLEDGE, TO THE UNINSTRUCTED NATIVES OF NORTH AMERICA; AND TO DEVELOPE THE STRUCTURE or A LARGE AND PECULIAR FAMILY OF LANGUAGES, 18, BY PERMISSION, DEDICATED, WITH SENTIMENTS OF UNFEIGNED GRATITUDE AND RESPECT, BY THEIR OBEDIENT SERVANT, THE AUTHOR. I t, I ' - Ml PREFACE. n^ It has been truly observed, that with the abundant information we possess on all other subjects, it is astonishing to reflect how little correct philosophical knowledge we have of the real condition of Man in a state of nature. Nor is it difficult to account for this. Travellers give us ample accounts of the physical character and condition of the inhabitants of newly discovered or uncivilized countries — they tell us of what is obvious to the senses — and here their accounts end. But Man is a compound subject. The mind and moral character are beyond their reach. A knowledge of these can be attained only through the medium of their Language, to acquire which, where it is merely oral, is a work of time, labour, and perse- verance. To separate into distinct words the ever- varying and unbroken articulations of an unknown tongue, — to arrange them in conformity with the genius of the language — to analyze and reduce them to their proper elements — in short, to reduce a chaos of new combinations of sound to order, and to dis- cover the intelligible though perhaps novel system in VI PREFACE. which they ought to be classed, is a most difficult, but, at the same time, a necessary task. Where this has not been accomplished, the native character can never be duly estimated — his answers and enquiries are often misunderstood ; his intentions misrepresented ; and the real state of his mind can be but very inade- quately conjectured. Hence arise mutual distrust and hostile feelings on both sides, which too often lead to acts of violence, and impress still more deeply the prejudice already existing in the mind of the stranger, as to the moral character and intellectual powers of the Indian, whom he was at first prepared to call an untutored Savage. The American Indian, notwithstanding his long connection and intimacy with the whites, is generally contemplated by them as coming under the same description. The object of this work is to raise him from this degrading designation to his just rank among ur species, and to leave an evidence for future times, when the people to whom it relates shall, in the progress of civilization, have been swept away, that its mental powers were of a higher order than had hitherto been supposed. The language of which the Grammar is now for the first time laid before the public, has always ap- peared to me a subject of peculiar interest. In an 1 PREFACE. yS Ethnological point of view, it may be considered as, substantially, the leading native language of all the tribes belonging to the British Settlements in North America — it is the language, indeed, of a na- tion which, in its different dialects, is dispersed over a vast extent of country — from Pennsylvania, south, to Churchill River, in Hudson's Bay, north, or twenty degrees of latitude : from Labrador and the Atlantic, east, to the Missisippi, west — from Hudson's Bay, east, to the Rocky Mountains, west — that is, in its greatest width (55" to 115°) sixty degrees of longitude. Historically, or as connected with the origin of nations, it is also full of interest — accordingly I have endeavoured so to shape my investigations as to enable the philologer to compare, in some points at least, this leading language of the new with those of the old world ; at the same time exhibiting to the gramma- rian the internal structure and mechanism of a new system of speech — a new plan of communicating thought. The Cree language, independently of its inherent interest, possesses great importance in relation to the diffusion of Christianity. The formidable difficulties in this respect, with which the missionary has to con- tend, which it requires almost a life to surmount, and which, in fact, few do surmount, are here removed — VIU PREFACE. he becomes at once, so to speak, a member of the Indian family, as well as competent to form an esti- mate of the mental powers and moral character of the New World, and to direct his course, and suit his counsels and arguments accordingly. In order to render my work as extensively useful as possible, on the appearance of the Translation of the Gospel of St. John, by Mr. Peter Joneh, to whom the Chippeway dialect is vernacular, I was induced to alter my plan, by combining as far as I conveniently could, the two dialects, the Cree and the Chippeway. His work is besides to me as a foundation — a rock that cannot be shaken. I have accordingly fortified myself with about 2200 citations ; my great aim being to leave as little as possible to be desired — nothing unexplained or unproved. It may be observed that the grammatical system of the Crees (and Chippeways) is composed of the same philological elements as are found in the Grammars of cultivated languages, but they are sometimes diffe- rently arranged and differently combined. The joining to the verb of the personal pronoun (def. and indef.) in all its cases, and in all their combinations, as Agent, Object, and End, to form the verbal inflexion, has a somewhat startling aspect for the student, but it should be borne in mind that there is a limit to rt -,--^ TRRFACE. ix these forms — a fixed plan or form for these several combinations — and that, when once the scheme of inflexion, &c. is well understood, the details are perhaps scarcely more difficult to acquire than the same pro- nominal, &c. elements in their changeful form and order in European tongues.* Transitive expressions are, especially, from this operation, necessarily long, as well in simple as in compound words — the attri- butive root is, to the eye, in a manner lost amongst its accessories; but they are nevertheless simple, because synthetical, every syllable or modifying ele- ment carrying with it a definitive meaning. From this hew manner of structure, — this new, unalterable collocation of the personal (inflected) signs,- -we have, as it were, a new organization of the same mental matter. A sentence often consists of much fewer separable parts or words. It has been absurdly stated, by some writers, that the Indian is obliged to gesticulate, in order to make himself understood by his fellows. On the contrary, it may safely be said, that in all the multifarious * It may be here obcerved, as worthy of notice, that this, among other forms of the verb, seems to bring into view a third generic family, as respects language. 1. Agent and Action, separate, as English. 2. Agent and Action, combined, as Lat. Ital. 3. Agent,, Action, Obj. Sic. combined, as Amer. T.angnages. PREFACE. transactions between the white and the red man, public and private, there is never contemplated (a competent interpreter being employed) any obstacle or difficulty on the ground of an imperfect appre- hension between the parties concerned. The red Indian, uncivilized as he is, can give expression to his thoughts with precision and fluency. With his Dictionary and Grammar in his mind, and always ready for his purpose, he describes, defines, compares, &c. in a manner suitable and in every way equal to the ever varying necessities of social intercourse — or of those connected with higher objects. All this he can do in the dark, or otherwise when gesticulation would be useless — as well as the civilized white man. Of the understanding and of the heart, his language is a faithful interpreter. The unseemly appearance which the Algonquin dialects generally present to the eye of the learner, proceeds often from a wrong division of the words — as well as a too fastidious or false orthography, they being generally characterized by a pleasing alternation of vowels and consonants. As respects sound — in the northern dialects (including the Cree and Chippeway) of this language the "rabid r," the obtuse /, the labials / and V, are never to be found. Compared with the Cree, the frequent omission (as in French,) of the > jf. PREFACE. xi . 1 1^ hissing s — the frequent insertion, &c. of the nasals m and n (p. 13, Note), mitigating the abruptness of the mute, &c. consonants, and a scale of intonation in the vowels, from the deepest d to the attenuated ee, all clearly enounced in a deep diapason tone of voice, with its native cadence and accentuation, give to the Chippeway an altogether delightful effect on the ear. My affections are naturally with the Cree, but I admire most the grave, majestic, dulcet tones of the Chip- peway. The pretensions of these tongues, are however limited. The circumstance that adjectives, which stand equally attributive to their substantive, must often take, each separately, the verbal or personally inflected form, would alone unfit them for poetry — a string of epithets so encumbered would make an indifferent figure in verse. But this languid manner of expres- sion harmonizes with the cautious character of the Indian; and should his more than classically regular'*^ language have few attractions for the man of ima- gination — to the philologist and the philosopher I cannot but believe that it will be an object of great price. • " More than classically regular," because the verb has no Conjugational exceptions, whereof to form an " As in praesenti" &c. as in European tongues. '^■-— - il .UJ- IW t iW Xll PREFACE. It is curious to observe that the language of the Algonquins of the American continent, and the Esqui- maux of Greenland, totally differing as they do in matter, should so strikingly agree in form — even in leading peculiarities of grammar — as respects Euro- pean languages, in grammatical anomalies — and would hence seem fully to justify the inference, that these two languages, which are generally called " mother- tongues," belong to one and the same high generic family. (See p. 318.) On the other hand, the many strong — fundamental ANALOGIES with Europeau, &c. tongues, which pervade and form the basis of the Algonquin System, shew clearly an affinity between the languages of the two Continents ; and leading us still higher in the history of nations, establish an intimate relationship between the primitive inhabitants of the Old and the New Worlds. I cannot doubt that, as radii issuing from a common centre, the Red and the White man are descended from a common source. In another point of view. The Grammatical cha- racter of the Cree, as an Inflected language on an extended plan, leads to the inference of a higher Origin than the mere casual, irregular, invention of man : and an attentive analysis of its Structure con- firms this view. When I observe in the verb, the 4 i •' K PREFACE. XIU method and consistency of its various Derivative Modes* — the regularity and exactness of their respec- tive subdivisions! — the manner, extent, and accuracy of the Pronominal, &c. Inflexions (Def. and Indef.) in their manifold (double, triple, quadruple) combina- tions — clearness of the correlative modifications | — distinctness in form and signification through all the details — when I contemplate this complicate but accurate mechanism in connection with a " Concord and Government" blending and connecting the several parts of the System logether, and a peculiar idiom or Genius presiding over all, I cannot but recognize in such a System, a regular organization of vocal utterance, affording to my own mind a circumstan- tially conclusive proof, that the whole is the emanation of ONE, and that a Divine Mind. Having been employed for twenty years of my life in the service of the Hon. Hudson's Bay Company, I was during that period engaged in an almost uninter- rupted intercourse with the natives. As long as it * Deriv. Adject, (verb.) — Imitat. — Augment. (Frequent, and Abund. Iterat.) and Dimin. — Distrib. — Transit. (General, Special, and Particular) — Causat. — Making — Possess. — Instrum. &c. — and their various combinations. + Conjug. Voice, Mood, Tense, " Gender," Number, Person. X Princip. and Subord. Absol. and Uelat. Act. and Pass. Defin. and Indef. of Person, Time, Action. Pos. and Neg. (Chippeway); &c. XIV PREFACE. was requisite, I had the assistance of an Interpreter ; but the absolute necessity of understanding and being understood by those among whom I was to live, made me diligent in endeavouring to learn their language ; and some knowledge of Latin, French, and Italian, acquired before I left England, enabled me to reduce to a Grammatical form, what could only be learned orally, and by routine. Notwithstanding the peculi- arities in the structure of this and other American tongues. Habit will, with attention on the learner's part, so familiarize them to the mind, that they may, after the lapse of many years, become as spontaneously the vehicle of his thoughts as his mother tongue. Such in fact was my own case, and this circumstance will, I hope, plead as my apology for any errors in style or phraseology which may be found in this work. I trust that having had so long and such favourable opportunities of making the Cree Language as it were my own, I shall not be thought presumptu- ous in supposing that I could explain the peculiarities of their Dialects more clearly and correctly than had been done previously : and if this little work should serve to raise in the estimation of their fellow men, the MENTAL CHARACTER of a Pcoplc, for wliom, to my latest moments, I shall entertain feelings of grateful and affectionate regard — if, especially, it should prove i '/f PREFACE XV serviceable to those pious men who are labouring to instruct them in the truths of the Christian Religion, I shall think my labour in composing it amply repaid, and the distinguished Societies to whose liberality I am indebted for its pubUcation, will have no reason to regret their patronage of this attempt to convey a more perfect knowledge of the structure of the Cree Language. The following extracts from Letters written by Mr. Bird, at Red River, who has lived upwards of fifty years among the Cree Indians ; and the Rev. Mr. Evans, who has also resided among them some years, and assisted in the translation of one of the Gospels into the Oojibway ("Chippeway") Dialect, published at New York, in 1837; will probably be considered as^ favourable testimonies to the ability and execution of this work. [^From Mr. Bird to the Author.'^ My dear Friend, Red River, July 26, 1842. I cannot find terms to express my admiration of the extent of knowledge which your Grammar evinces. |[J'ro»n the same to the same.'] Red River, Aug. 8, 1843. The Rev. Mr. Smithurst has, by well studying your Grammar, been enabled to read the Communion Service to the Swampeys, in Cree, a few days ago; and my son [|an Interpreter], who went to hear it, says he did it wonderfully well. \^1 XVI PREFACE. f 27, Reciprocal, 84, 95, 228. Simulative (4th Conjugation), I9, 20, 84. Negative (Chippeway), 63, 20G, 234, 278. Possessive, 21 obs. 10, 139* Instrumentive (3d Conjug.), 20, 121, 234. Absolute and Relative, 132, 158, IG2. Active and Passive, 26,27, 57, IO6 et seq. 114 et seq. 212, 213, 255 et seq. 262 et seq. MOODS, Indicative, I9I, 199, 213 &c. 252, 260. Subjunctive, 195, 201, 251 &c. 252, 260. ,, Imperative, 204, 220, 225, &c. Optative 1 . ... . ,„^ „ . , V Auxiliaries, 199- PotentialJ Suppositive (Indicative), 205, 302, et seq. Dubitative (Subjunctive), 205, 302. Negative (Chippeway), 63, 206, 234, 278. Infinitive, 262, 313. TENSES, Present and Preterite, see Accidence and Addenda. Future, &c. Auxiliaries, 199.203.302. Indefinite (Time), 73 et seq., 202. 203. 217- 275, 323. Present and Indefinite (Imperative), 204, 220, 225. CASES, Direct, 256, 311. Oblique, 55, 117 et seq., 209, 229 etseq., 256,265 ct seq. 271, 277 V'ocat.). Possess, or Accessory, 123, 209, 265 ct seq. INDEX. Xix GENDERS, 130, 199, 212. NUMBERS, Singular and Plural, Passim. No Dual. PERSONS, 51, 60, 185. | Indefinite, 98 etseq. 105, 107 et scq. 122, 259. ADVERBS, 33, 239 et seq., 281. CONJUNCTIONS, 34, 242, 284. PREPOSITIONS, 34, 242, 288, 29O. INTERJECTIONS, 34, 243, 291- ELEMENTARY WORDS, as Being, Quality, Energy, &c. 134 et seq. Relation, I67. Privation, 169. Degree or Intensity, 152, 172. ' COMPOUND WORDS, 177, 292. '[ ACCIDENCE, 181. . V. - . .. . n1 SYNTAX, 244. NEGATION, 63, 206, 234, 278. ' ', ' * / INTERROGATION, 279. ' • ' i r- SENTENCES, 252, 294. ; , , : r* •■_ THE ELLIPSIS, 296. ACCENT, &c. 297. . H ;rs f ADDENDA, 300. FURTHER REMARKS, 309- Of the VERB SUBSTANTIVE, &c. 135 ct seq. I98 et seq. 254, 314. DIALECT, 316, 323. ADDITIONAL NOTES, 318. ELEMENTARY WORDS, 321. SUPPLEMENTARY REMARKS, 322. .f ERRATA, &c. For "Ethinu," read " Ethin'u" nassim. p. 77, line 17, dele " Italian and." pp. 80, line 6, and 146, line 17, to "it so moveth," add "groweth, becom- eth." p. 129, line 19, dele "(the subjunctive)." p. 136, line 29, for " Eth," read " Eth or Ethb." p. 213, line 15, to " he loves him," add " or them." p. 233, line 9, read " Accusative, Dativk, and Possebsivb Cases combined." p. 301, line 1, to " subjunctive" &c. add "(see Verb Subst. Subj. Present, p. 201.)" p. 304, line 21, for "(plu. •lorf)" read " (plu. -wow).*' A GKAMMAK OF THE CREE LANGUAGE, INTRODUCTION. THE ALOONQUINS. Of all the peculiar circumstances which charac- terize the new world, none is more calculated to attract the attention of the general enquirer than the vast number of nations, apparently distinct in origin, which overspread that immense continent. Of the chief of these, various writers have, according to theii* respective means of information, given us some ac- count, and especially of the Algonquin people, one of the most conspicuous among the ancient nations of the northern division of the new world. In the Indian family, these stand in high relief. From their numbers, as well as the extent of the territory they possess, they derive a paramount claim to distinction, as from their long intercourse with ourselves, commercially and otherwise, they ought to have a strong hold on our affections. It is probable that the history of such a nation is closely linked with that of the first peopling of the western hemisphere. B .1 A (iltAMMAK III' Descriptions ol tlu* wliolf {oiinliy ot tlu' Algoii- quins,* \vr possess in ample detail ; its luiineroiis lakes and rivers have all been explored, and are d«'lineated on onr maps ; iiis native habits, means of subsistence, * 'riu< ciiuntry of tli«> Algou(|uiiii« nwiy, pcrliap!*, l)i* (Idiiicd, ill goiiorHl torniM, n» lying brtwccn t\\v torti«>tli iiiul mxtieth clegr >r North l.atitiuit (I \h'U tlu> Mi >pi Hiid line trees drawn trt>in its lieail waters north-westerly to CiiiiihcrlHiul House, &c> on the west side, Hiui the Atlnntic and Hudson's Kny on the eait. Within this extensive region are Couiul most oC the (Ircat Lakes of Ameriea, This nation consists of many tribes, (vide Dr. Prichaiid's " licseatcht'Sy J^r," vol. '2,) of which the Crces, called by some authors Kris, Knisteneaux, Killiilenoes, N^helhoways, &c. •eem to bo the principal, and to occupy the greatest extent of country, viz. all, or nearly all that territory, the nuinenms rivers of which carry their waters into Hudson's Bay. The domain of the Crees (whose national name is Nf^hcthdrvuck, i.e. "exact beings or people,") may also be considered as divided into large districts, which nre severally distinguished by the name of some notable hill, lake, river, SiC. within or bordering on these territorial divisions, and each of them has generally its own dialect — that is, their language is marked by some of those interchanges of cognate sounds which will hereafter be more particularly noticed. The inhabitants of each of these districts further divide them- selves into bands or families, which are also distinguished by the name of some remarkable object in the tract in which they are accustomed to hunt ; but, in this case, instead of the general denomination "ethinuMA-" — "Indians," by which the inhabitants of a district or a whole nation are known, and which may be con- sidered as the generic appellation, they receive or assume, in these smaller divisions, its diminutive form, " ethin^csuk," indicative of their subordinate importance ; so Wiiskwy-wuchee-ethin^Mu*, " the Birch-hill Indians," may be considered as a branch of the Kisseesk4hchewun-ethinu»A', i. e. of the Indians belonging to the district on the river of that name. ) > TUK CnV.K I,ANfHl,\(JK. I and indeed almoHt every tliiiit; (connected with the Algi'iiuiuii) (ind hiK wigwuin have been accurately described. Notbinj; HeeniH to be wanting to com- pU^te our thorou^ii ac({uaintance with hini, but a correct account of bin lan{j;uap;e ; a point indeed of importance, as being the only avenue to a knowledge of bis origin and intellectual and moral character. In more general tcrmt?, it is through tbc medium of bis language alone tbat we can attain to the native Indian's mind — to that peculiar kind of human intellect, which, in all probability, is one of the links connecting the history of these tribes with that of other nations. In order to supply this desideratum, I shall en- deavour to exhibit the information 1 gained on this subject, during a residence of many years among the Crees (one of the Alg6nquin tribes), in a detailed, but as compendious a manner as I am able. I pro- pose, in the first place, to take a cursory view of the present state of our information respecting the Algonquin language, making, at the same time, some brief observations on its general character ; and secondly, to give an analytical and grammatical view of the Cree dialect — with such illustrationa, from the kindred dialect of the Chippeways, as may throw additional light on disputable or difficult points, and elucidate, in a manner more generally intel- ligible, those principles in their structure which have hitherto proved a barrier to the attainment of these languages. It has been already hinted, that the knowledge we possess of the native American languages is very B 2 4 A GRAMMAR OF limited, tliough, perhaps, we are better informed respecting that of the Algonquin family than any other : this information appears to have been chiefly derived from the missionaries, whom a great part of a long life passed among those people in the diligent exercise of their spiritual calling (for which an intimate acquaintance with the language would seem indispen- sable) , may be naturally supposed to have thoroughly qualified for furnishing abundant and correct infor- mation, theoretical as well as practical, But their endeavours do not seem to have been crowned with the success which their pious intentions merited : nor has any advance, I think, been made since the venerable Eliot published his ''Indian Grammar begun, in 1666," (more than a century and a half ago,) which, as the title implies, was considered by himself as merely an elementary treatise. From the circumstance of his having translated the Bible into the language of the Massachusetts Indians, or rather from his being the reputed trans- lator, (which is a very different thing,) it has been erroneously supposed that he was thoroughly versed in their language ; I say erroneously, for he himself admits, in his Grammar, published two years after the first edition of his Bible, that he " thinks there be some more (concordances) , but I have beat out no more." From this admission alone, it may be fairly inferred, and, indeed, any one qualified to judge of the nature of the undertaking will at once conclude, that the translation, if correct, was formed only by the assistance of a half-breed interpreter, to whom \ .1 TMK CllEK LANGUAGK. both languages were equally familiar. I am much inclined to think, however, that, grammatically con- sidered, it is an imperfect performance. Cotton, also, was a learned missionary, and to him his contemporary Eliot acknowledges his great obligations for assistance, especially in the second edition of this translation. Though he wrote sermons in this language, yet he did no more towards com- municating a knowledge of it than compile a copious, and, as far as it goes, a valuable vocabulary. It does not appear that either of them could make a grammar embracing all the principles of the language in which they preached and wrote. These observations are by no means made with a view to discredit the labours of the very respectable persons here mentioned, but merely to show how diffi- cult it is for any European to make himself thoroughly master of the principles of the Algonquin tongue. Nothing appeared on this subject, 1 believe, between 1666 and 1788, a period of more than 120 years, when Dr. Jonathan Edwards* commijnicated to of e, >y m * Dr. Edwards also, as he inlbnns us, enjoyed the most favour- able advantages for acquiring the Indian tongue. He "constantly, from his childhood upwards, associated with the Indians, and acquired a great facility in speaking their language; it became more familiar to him than his mother tongue ; even all his thoughts ran in Indian," &c. To this " perfect familiarity with their dialect," (the Mohegan) lie is stated to have " united a stock of grammatical and other learning, which well qualified him for the task of reducing an un- written language to the rules of grammar," &c. With all thes^ A GRAMMAR OF the Connecticut Societv of Arts and Sciences, a paper on the Moh^gan dialect, (see Massachusetts Historical Collections, vol. 10,) containing various desultory remarks on the grammatical structure of the North American languages, but without much extend- ing the knowledge respecting them already possessed. Though he was, perhaps, a less skilful grammarian than Eliot, he corrected one of his (Eliot's) promi- nent errors, by denying the existence of an infinitive mood. The value of his authority is however greatly lessened, as was before observed, by the singidar errors into which he has fallen. In 1823, nearly half a century after the appearance of the above paper, the American Philosophical Society published a Grammar of one of the dialects (the Delaware) translated into English by the learned Mr. Du Ponceau, from the manuscript of Zeisberger, a German missionary, with a very valuable preface by the Translator. This grammar contains a great deal of matter, much more than all the rest put together, but, in its present form, is ill calculated to improve our theoretical acquaintance with these idioms. The materials for illustration are generally ill chosen, the parts of the verb often erroneously constructed, and withal the arrangement of them is made on such an i; advantages, however, it cannot be denied that, some of his obser- vations, even on important points, are erroneous, and others are calculated to mislead, as, I trust, will be shewn in the proper place. "Jonathan Edwards, D.D., was pastor of a church in New Haven, !ind member of the Connecticut Society of Arts and Sciences." i THE CRKE LANGUAGE. 7 I; incongruous plan as greatly to lessen the merit which the work would otherwise possess. It is, besides, de- fective in several important points. Yet we are told, that this venerable missionary, wlio died in 1808, at the advanced age of eighty-seven, had resided among them upwards of sixty years, " preaching the gospel to them in their native idioms." But in this compila- tion there is sufficient evidence of his having never thoroughly understood theoretically this or any other language of similar structure. We come now to another venerable and experienced missionary, (and he is the last on my Ust,) in the person of Heckewelder, who was likewise considered as well skilled in the languages of the Indians, having passed forty years of his long life among them. He was also, it appears, a member of the American Philosophical Society. An extended correspondence on this very interesting subject, between him and that eminent scholar, Mr. Du Ponceau, its then secretary, has been laid before the public. The observations of Hecke- welder prove however too desultory and unimportant to be of much use, and are often too carelessly made to be judicious or correct; his definitions, also, are frequently crude and unsatisfactory. To generalize correctly on this subject, above all others, requires great reflection and care. So perplexed and intricate is the structure of these languages to a person who does not possess a comprehensive knowledge of their anomalous forms, that he must return to his point again and again, for the hundredth time, before he can obtain such a result as deserves to be noted down. It cannot be investi- i:; li 'I 8 A C4KAMMAK OF gated hastily without danger of tlie risk that Hiicke- WELDER often incurred, of being iost in a mist of his own raising. Besides, though doubtless sufliciently skilled in the language for all practical purposes in his vocation, he was evidently far from being a pro- found Indian scholar. In taking this brief retrospect, I have been perform- ing an unpleasant task, but I could not do otherwise, considering the acknowledged darkness in which we are still involved, with respect to the grannnar of these North American languages. The several au- thors, enumerated above, seem indeed to have reached a certain j)oint of information, beyond which the genius of the language has been to them all, as a terra mcognlta. The study of these idioms, and very probably of all oral uncultivated languages, is indeed full of perplexity. The path of the entpiirer is beset with obstacles in every direction. Even sujiposing him to have sur- mounted, in some degree, the first difficulty of gaining the names of tliiiujs and actionn, he has yet to attain to a distinct knowledge of the various rclulions in which they are combined together, or their grammatical value in a sentence, and this too in a system differing altogether from that of his own language. This is, indeed, even in a simple phrase or sentence, no light task, but the great, the hitherto unsurmounted diffi- culty is correct interpretation, and correct classification of, or the giving of right names to, the anomalous members of a sentence, or groups of ideas. This is a fruitful source of confusion and error, arising indeed U run f KICK LAN(;iIAfiK. 9 'g IS d Bometiines from ii necessity inseparable from the cir- cumstances of the case, of generalizing from too few particuhirs. Accordingly, I liave been able to detect, among these grammarians, no fewer than six.different names for the same form of the verb. Thns have they all gone astray. Their participles and infinitives are mere phantoms, that irrecoverably seduce them from the right ])ath, and would be alone insuperable obstacles to the forming of a right system. The native American has a grammatical system of his own. From this view of the subject, we need not feel Kurprizcd that very strange notions, as erroneous as strange, have been entertained with respect to the American Indians and their languages. So has it not only been said that they liave few ideas, and that their languages are consequently poor, but a writer in a respectable American periodical, of a recent date, {N. A. Review, Jan. 1826,) has even gone so far as to assert that " this strange poverty in their languages is supplied by gesticulation \ and that no man has ever seen an Indian in conversation without being sensible that the head, the hands, and the body, are all })ut in re{[uisition to aid the tongue in the performance of its appropriate duty." An assertion so extravagant, so diametrically opposed to the truth, may be safely left to the disposal of the better informed writers before named ; and is only here noticed as an evidence of the ignorance that still prevails on this very inte^ resting subject. As, on the one hand, the assertion just quoted is a 10 A GRAMMAR OF complete misrepresentation of the Indian language, so neither, on the other, is it rightly conceived of by those who imagine that even the conmion concerns of life are discoursed on through the medium of ti'ope and figure. Both of these are wide of the truth. To remove these erroneous impressions, and to convey a more correct notion of this subject, 1 may observe that the language of the Indian, in its largest sense, is a matter both of progressive, and, as it were, of systematic acquirement — growing with his growth, and reaching perfection only as he arrives towards maturity. The child surrounded by sensible objects, domestic and external, gradually learns the names of these — of things, and actions, and their modes of rela- tion (to, from, &c.) and the fond garrulity of a mother, joined to that of its playmates, simultaneously ac- customs its mind to the use of all the inflections by which those relations are expressed. Infancy may be called especially the grammar a^,- — the season of laying the foundation for the future superstructure. The next step is, perhaps, narrative discourse. In this the now enquiring youth derives, from the ample subjects of hunting, war, &c. an abundant accession of new terms and new combinations. Didactic topics are suited to a still maturer age, supplying the com- plement of his stock of moral and intellectual ideas, and their names. The aged impart to youth — the parent to his children of riper years — for their infor- mation and pro the fruits of his own experience — his own kno\\: .ge. He recounts events — deduces rules of conduct — gives advice and instruction. It THE CREK LANfUf.VCIK 11 is a subject for the understanding, involving the discipline of the mind. The language as well as the character of the Indian seems now to be completed. He is competent to the interchange of thought, to converse, and to judge on every subject that may come under his notice. At this point he has arrived too without artijiciul helps; it appears to be the natural, necessary, but progressive result of the gradual developement of his physical and mental faculties, for this result is the same for all Indians. But, here we must stop. The power of readily choos- ing and combining, from his various stock of materials, so as to form figurative expressions, is to him personal and peculiar. Not every Indian is an orator. It is no uncommon thing to see a distinguished chief employ some other person to deliver his harangues. From these brief observations on the general sm6/ &c. of Indian languages, I proceed to make a remarks on their specific form, &c. with a parti reference to the Algonquin dialects. The whole fabric of language, as exhibited in ti American idioms, compared with European tongues, is of a very peculiar structure, cast, as it appears, in a very different mould from ours, and offering to the grammarian a novel and singularly organized system of speech, and to the metaphysician a new view of the ( perations of the human mind. The ideas are often differently grouped — in those groups the ideas are often differently disposed, and the terms expressing them differently arranged. Long expressions in English are sometimes shortened, and short ones are lengthened. 12 A GRAMMAR OK Yet it is a system complete in the mechanism of its parts, and adequate to the end desired. It is only, indeed, it" I may so say, lanj.';uage under a new phase. The want of some forms, and the modification of others, are compensated in a manner to which the European is wholly a stranger. This system furnishes a heautiful specimen o^ order, in the midst of the greatest apparent, and, as it would seem, unavoidahle confusion and disorder. Regular in its forms, it has especial care to distinguish the natural from the adventitious; the definite from the indefinite accidents, as well of person, as of action ; the act from the habit ; the particular instance from the general character or disposition. In want of a name for a thing, the American defines or describes it. It is not so copious as languages enriched by science and civilization, but analogous, perhaps, in character to that which we find in the early part of the first book of the Bible, which appears to describe the cir- cumstances of mankind in a state antecedent to the arts and sciences of civilized life ; but it is abundantly stored with terms connected with the arts of fishing, hunt, ing, &c. the sciences of savage life. Indeed, contrary to the prevailing notions, tins language will be found to be adequate, not only to the mere expression of their wants, but to that of every circumstance or sentiment that can, in any way, interest or afiect un- cultivated minds. I may add that as, perhaps, no cultivated language is more susceptible of analysis than the Cree and the Chippeway, so I am greatly disposed to think that I THE CUKI' LANtJUA(JK. 13 tio language is better adapted t!ian the former of these,* for the purpose of philosophical investigation, whether with a reference to its own system, or, as an object of comparison, with the languages of the old world. As the Indian languages are numerous, so do they greatly vary in their effect on the ear. We have the rapid CSotoonay of the Rocky Mountains, and the stately Blackfoot of the plains, the slow embarrassed Flat-head of the mountains, the smooth-toned Pierced- nose, the guttural difficult Sussee and Chepewydn, the sing-song A'ssinneboigne, the deliberate Cree, and the sonorous majestic Chippeway. Differing as they do in this respect, it is worthy of notice that the different tribes, or nations of that hemisphere discover a much greater aptitude or facility in acquiring the language of each other than they do in learning any European tongue, which, indeed, they can rarely, * My reason for preferring the Cree for the purpose men- tioned, is not that the Chippeway does not contain in its structure the same grammatical elements, but that they are sometimes not so obvious — so well defined — e.g. the nasals m and n, which constantly occur in the latter, are often found, (as in mb, nd, vg, &c.) when compared with corresponding terms in the former, to be unnecessary adjuncts, not modifying the meaning of the root, and are therefore merely expletive, at least, however they may add to the beauty of the language. But, besides this, by the change of th and tovd into their cognate n (see Dialect), which frequently happens, three important elements are resolved into one, which consequently, even without the addition of the redundant n above mentioned, becomes, to the mere Chippeway scholar, ambiguous and perplexing, if not fatal to the object of his research. 14 if A (iKAMMAK Ol ever, atteinpt. (I here speaU ol" the ('lees) lit- induced to The European finds the smne difficulty in ac(|uirini:: theirs. Their turn of nnnd leads them to group tiieir ideas and conihine their thoughts after their own pecuhar manner, tliough indeed, in some of these Umguages, llie thoughts are expressed through tiie nuMhum of sounds, as mdike to those uttered hy otiier nations as it can he imagined the vocal organs can pro(hice. Some of tiiese h\nguages arc, more than others, in accordance with our own system of articulation, as the Cree and the C!u|)pe\vay now under con- sideration, which are therefore fortunately well adapted for our j)urpose. These, though strictly cognate idioms, are marked hy difi'erences of an inte- resting description ; the one (the Chippeway) is, even in the vowels, very strongly nasal, from which the Cree is, in the northern districts at least, perfectly free. The Chippeway has two negatives, like the French ; one of which, in negative propositions, is interwoven with the verh through all its forms. Its cognate Cree knows nothing of this negative form. The great characteristic which distinguishes the languages of the new from those of the old world, is found in the peculiar structure and powers of their verh, and this will be the subject of the next chapter. u I TIIK ( HliU I.ANiaiAOK. 15 1 PART I. H OF THE VERB. 4 Of the Indian verb, as respects its nature or essence, it may, without hesitation, be said to be strictly analogous to the part of speech in European lan- guages, bearing the same name ; viz. as — predicating, being ; as — Net' i-dn, I am ; or manner of being or acting, as — Ne nehe'theten, I am glad ; NeVilwkoosin, I am sick ; Nenepowin, I stand ; Ne pemootan, I walk, &c. ; and of all this class of terms I consider the verb substantive, in the Cree language, to be proximately or remotely the nucleus. To convey a right notion of its powers, however, we must necessarily go into detail. These are, as already remarked, more extensive than in some European tongues, and are proportionately, at least, more difficult to exhibit in an intelligible arrange- ment. With a view to clearness on this point, I shall make my observations on this intricate subject under three general heads, viz. First — The matter or materials of which the verb is composed. Secondly — Its kinds. Thirdly — Its forms as developed in its various in- flections. 16 A OKAMMAK OK ClIAPTKR I. The first of the heads above mentioned, or the mat- ter of which the Indian verb consists, may be further viewed with advantage in these five ways, viz. I. As to its origin. II. As consisting of a root and affix. III. As primitive or derivative. IV. As absolute or rehitive. V, As simple or com])ound. Section I. As to the Origin of the Verb. The Indian verb is of various origin, e. g. 1 . It comes from the names of things, as nouns. 2 qualities, as adnouns. 3 energy or action, as verbs. 4 re/a^ions, as pronouns adverbs, &c. First. — The noun is the root of several kinds of verbs, among others of the following, formed from Nippee, water. (See Accidence.) THK CREB LANGUAUK. 17 l- er I. Nipp^efvoo (animate.) He it watt nf i. e. possesses the nature of water. Nupayoo, a man ; (vir) nupuywoo, he is (a) man. Oow&sais, a child ; oow&ssisewoo, he is (a) child. F16okemow, a chief; h6okem6n'oo, he is (a) chief. K6ona, snotv ; k6onerfoo, he is snowy, i. e. he is covered with snow. Nipp6en>Mn (inHnimute). It is watery i. e. possessing its na- ture). // I* wet. Munnet6rt)»<«, it is CiO(/-//Ar(; (supernatural). Numm&isewun liskee (inan.) ; it is a fish_y country (from nummais, a fish). A^ssiskeewun (inan.), it is Austt/ (from assiskee, dust, also earth). ti^uiiewM/i, it is snow^, covered with snow. This form asserts the nature or essence of the noun to be in the subject. ' The subjoined notes are taken from Mr. Peter Jones's CMppeway Translation of the Gospel of St. John, printed for the British and Foreign Bible So- ciety, London, 1831. [See Accidence."] It will be useful to the reader, in investigating these two dialects, or in comparing them together, to bear in mind that the labial letters, b, p, m, and 00, or w, are convertible, as are also the linguals, th, d, t, n, s, st, ts, ch, sh, z, zh, j. The CMppeways also often omit the Cree s, Cree — Net' Et^theten, / think it, is in Chippeway, Nind' endindon. Tahn' ispeeteek. How large is it ? A'hneen menik ? U'pkee, country. A'hkeh (Jones). Note — Animate and inanimate refer to gender. [See Accidence.} > St. John, i. 23, Oogemah. . Lord or chief. xviii. 37, Ked'oogemowA (Indie). . Thou art (a) chief Oogemahweyon (Subj.). . That I am (a) king. xii. 42. Wagemdhu)e;i^ (Subj.). . Who icere chiefs, vi. 70. Mahje-muned6oweA (Indie). . He is (a) devil. X. 21. Maje-muned6ou;tc{ (Subj.). . Who is (a) devil, iv. 24. OojechihgooweA (Indie). . He is (a) spirit. C 18 A GRAMMAR OF • 2- NippeewmM (anim.) he is rvaler-\\ke, water-ish, (notdiminut.) Njipayoo, a man ; (vir) napjiynimw, he is wfln-like, manly. Ethinuj (homo) a man, an Indian ; EthinefU, he is wise, discreet. Nippeewow (inan.), it is tvater-like, watery, materish, humid. Kiisketayoo, a burnt coal ; k»'isket%won), it is coa/-like, i. e. black. Mithkoo, blood ; mithkwow, it is blood-Y^e, i. e. red. Pewapisk, metal, pewapiskwow, it is metal-\\ke, i.e. metallic. This form shows the manner, or resemblance, of the noun to be in the subject. 3. NippeewJ**oo (anim.), he is watered {wetted). Nipp6wda_yoo (inan.) it is watered (wetted). This form implies the accident or accession of the 7ioun to the subject. 4. NippeeA — This form intimates abundance of the noun— water abounds, or there is abundance of water. M6nis, a berry ; miniaeskdw berries abound. Attik, a deer ; gXMiVooskdw, deer abound. Minnuhik, a spruce Jir ; minnahikoos^ow, sp'^iirr jirs abound. ♦ 10. Oo-NippecTKM — This form {oot before a vowel) shows that the subject possesses the noun — he has, i. e. owns or possesses water. Oonkpklmu, .she has, or possesses, a man, i.e. a husband. Ootemw, he possesses a horse, or horses. Assam, a .mow-shoe. Oot'asahmu, he has snow-shoes. QThus in these possessive verbs, the object may, in Cree, be either singular or plural ; but, in Chippeway, they follow the common rules of agreement.] * 1 1 . Hookemowt'i/jcOToyoo, he chief-ihmka him ; i. e. considers him a chief. This subject^ thinks the person, thing, &c. expressed by the * V. 3. N^eh. . Water. iii. 23. Nebeh-taA (pres. for preter.). . There was much water, vi. 10. Meenzhahshkooita^un (preter.) . . There was much grass. * iv. 16. Ke nahbaim . . Thy husband. iv. 16. Nind' oonahbdmese. (poss. neg.}. . I have no husband, iv. 18. Kah oonahbameyuntjr (poss.) . . Whom thou husbandest them, hast had as husbands. Note — ^The present and the compound of the present, are often used for the past tenses. 6 viii. 49. Nind' oogemahwflnemaA (indie.) . . / chief-/fttnt-Am, " honour him." xii. 26. Ka oogeraaAmdnemahjin (subj.) . ." He will honour him.^' V. 23. Che OQgemahwdnemegood (pass, subj.) . . That he should be honoured by, (&c.) 22 A GRAMMAR OF noun, to be in the object. The general principle, that, in a compounded verb, the accessory member is, in these dialects, a secondary attributive, will be noticed hereafter. This form constitutes perhaps the only exception to the rule. Most if not all nouns, both primitive and derivative, have their derivative verbs also, as, Wcegee (g hard), a tent or dwelling. Weegti (neut.), he dwells or tents. Wdgeemayoo (transit.) he tent-eth (with) him. Wegee»iogg»/M, a tent-m&te or person tented with. [See Passive Nouns."] Usk6eoo, he countries, i. e. he dwells in that quarter (from uskee, country). Weet'xxskeemdyoo, he com-patriot-eth him (transit). Weet-uakeemcggun, fellow-countryma/e. Ootdwe, father. Ootdwt'eoo, he is (a) father. Ootawemayoo, he fathers him, i. e. he is his father, or by adoption, &c. he is a father to him.'' T V. 17 N'oos. . My father, ill. 35. Way6osem»» /iKr-innkcN «»r plaitd ; (\\y\wvkiit^t(i , \'\ut'-uinkr-tliou-H, plait it. r'miHk, a liratH'f ; iiV^kHyoo, he tx licaverittg, i. v. taking lu'avi'r. /•."sko«)tny«M), //re , skn/rm' »)r HikA/«'«i', lu* striken ///r or a lif(/it. Ki'uttany/f/cw, he luako.s a fire. IM. Others M.v.vMmc a pretix, as I'rom hipfivv (liinpee-v (11111111.1, as above. //-lippoo/ojr, ho puts a line lo or alumt it, lu« coriis it, tScc. r/-i1ppiH>9«•). SHkohutn, lu\/tVr.v it. sets it onjirc. Si*»\^ct/iofV(iixu (toiupor), lu> is riikesbfiniunc(16owc(A)pi/is (reHect. indie.) .... TAom niukp.s/ thyself ^I'd- i. 6. Enench, (homo) . . A man. vii. \'2. EnOnewfA (indie.). . He is a (good) man. X. 33. E'nemVfyim (subj.). . Who art a man. XA-iii. 35. Kimf oojcwypteA (indie). . / am a Jew. iv. 9- .'ew«'y«» (subj.). . ll'Ao art a Jew. I I TIIK ('IIUK I.AN(H;A(1K. •jr. •ir* ih'nUd. The roriner, dt'riviul iroiii tlicu(lnuuii,expreHH wimt iH vilicrml, native, spotUnneouH, and will hv deno- iiiiitiitod AdjcrJiva vorl)H : the hitter, derived IVorii wordH exprt^HHinf^ what is ailvcntUious to the Huhjcet, contimjml, foreifjn, acquired, — have a puHsivc uigniH- cation, and will Ik; called acddmtal paHsive verhB, in contradiHtinr^tion to partinpial nm\ other paHsive verhs, which will he noticed hereafter. as ad.fkctivp: vkimis. " ANIMATR. W/jwoAvM he is circiilnr. l'ittiko().v» //(■ IS Hplicrical. Kvw issii he is roMf^h. S6osko(>.TM he i.\ ninootli. A'wk<)o.vK he is nivk. Kiiiw«>(UM, he is long or tiill. Nuppi'ii'kiiwM he is flat. CliiniincHmw hr. is Nliort. INANIMATK. WOwi'ow it is circular. I'lttikwoH; it is Hpherical. K6w(iw it is roii|{h. S6oHkw»w i( is smooth. A'wkwM7» it is Httong, Uirt. Kinwr>»> it it long. NCippuckwrw it is flat. (.'liiiniiiiiHin it is Mliort. '■* V. .U). OuncHhcHhm (indic. inan.) . .it is Kood. i. 46. tVdncH\n'.H]\inff (hiiIij.) . . which is ^ood. [See 8ec. U, Auyinen- tatives.^ ii. 10. MahyahnuhdahArin (Hubj. inan.) . . which is bad. [id.] vi. 27- PandliduA: (Hubj. inan.) . . which is bad. viii. 9- V&hidhzewod (mibj. anim.) . . that they are bad, Hinful. viii. 3. Miigwah peHbcgw&hdezif/ (subj.) . . at the time she is loose, wanton. V. 7. Mahkczifi (Hubj.) . . who is liimv.. iv. 6. Ahy&kooztc/ (oubj.) . . who is weary, xi. 3. A'bkooze (indie.) .. he is sick, xi. 1. A'hkoozeAun (indie pret.) . . he was sick. V. .5. Ayahkooztci (subj. augment.) who is sick, xii. 5 and 8. Kademahgeze/t^ (subj.) . . who are poor, piteous, viii. 54. Tab endhbahta^moon (indie, neg.) . . it will not be useful. [See Paradigm of the Negative Verb.] 96 A (IKAMMAIt or A'p))iNMvf>.tN he is niiimU. M^'tluMM Af- tx good. Miiu(.UN he is (liliiciilt. A '|i|iiN(<.viN il ix miiimII. Mrlliou' t/ M good. M('tlio\V(>NfH it is good, uwv. MnXhMun it is Imd. A'l)iiUt>M it is UNt't'nl. Ispoir it is high, ns i\ hoiiHO. A'thniu/» i7 t,( ditlii'ult. AlTIDKNTAl, (PASSIVK) VKHHS •" ('htmnia.v(Ni IVwoc. M«\stn.V(>i) Trtsko-vot) Fskw.lwH) Tahkmij>».v.v(X) Kiiski V•.\s^tly^M) Mo!Jla/ 'rrtsko/rtvc*-) F.skwji/(;vc>«) T:ihk«H)pi7/«M (pret. neg.) . . 1/ was not »ewed. xviii. '24. MinjeniftprrooHk/^sid)). anim. poss. rastO , . tcAo fcns bound, xxi. 11. M6oshkc«nnid {\AA . . lehich was filW. t i n n )«/. i ?d. 1(1. TIIK CKKK l,AN(aiA(UC. 21 It limy l>c ol)Hi!i-v(!(l, tliiit Hoiiic rootu ure HUHCcptibU: ul both tlu;Hc iikhIch of tin; verb, <;. g. ADJIUTIVK VKHHH. Animnlr — IJ'ck.»« he in loul, i.r. mrt clmn, dirty. UV'rtlii'iwm' H in foul. KipprNMK /«■ <# Nliiit, Htoppfv/ I iialiirHlly «ir KipiK/U) il in Nliiit, ttU»\ipeU f spoiitHtivdUHly. Niippt'K'kf.i.vK //(■ {.v Hat. Nuppiicktno il is (Int. Kiiiw.vM he is Htrotig (»r hard. Mi'iHkowow it is ntrorig or hard. IViriHk6w»n t^ i«Htrong, liard, &c. (moral.) QuiCiHkfXMM he is Htraight, not crooked, (jiiiuskwow il is Ntraight. QriiuHkmM he is open, Htraight-forward, frank. QriiuskwHK il is right, reasonable. ACCIDENTAL (PASSIVE) VERB.S. U'ckoofoo he is sunpended, hung, (pass.) Vckoolayoo it is suspended/, hung. Ex. Anim. — U'ckooHOOwu/fc net' ass&muk, i. e. 'ITiey are hung up, my snow-shoeH. Jnan. — U'rkootaywaA ne miiskesinoA. . They are hung up, my shocH. ) 1 '1 28 A riKAMMAK OP WeethepiMoo Weethepe/a^oo Kippoo.roo Kippou/ayoo !Vuppucki.»o(; Nuppiicke/a^oo Kinvfoosoo Kinwoo/a^oo "Wavfgissoo Wky/getayoo Mdakbv/iisoo Muak6vf etai/oo he is fouled ov aoiled. H is fouled or soiled. he is stoppec/ \ artificially, as a bottle it is stoppcc^ ' or u path. he is flatten/. it is flatted. he is lengthenef/. it ia lengthetiet/. he is bent. it is bent. he is strengthened or hardener/. it is strengthened/ or hardeni'tooHi.vji7 (8ubj. aing.), an it if diH'ercnt, other. NrshtMH/A", iheif arc two. Kah i\i'»\u'chik (siibj.), which arc two, i.e. the tvM. [See (Construction «il' the Attributive Verb, and of the Article.'] Thirf)i.y — The names of Energy and Action, and their contraries, furnish the class of ATew^er Verbs,'* as ! '•^ X. 1. Piihkon (udverl)) . . separate, distinct, " some other way." X.X. 7. Fdhkon . . " in a place by itself." V. 32. Bahkiihnpze (intlic. animate) he is diff'Tcnt, other, " there is another." V. 43. and iv. 37. )Mika\\nezid (subj. animate) . . which is different, " another" (jierson). xviii. 34, '.<•. 38, and x. 16. Vaka.\mez(jig (idem) . . which are, &c. " others, other," persons, sheej). vi. '22. Bukahnut (subj. inan. sing ) . . which is different "other" boat, vi. 23, XX. 30, and xxi. 25. BdkahnaA^m (idem plural) . . which nre, iyc. *' other" boats, signs, things, i. 40. Piizhig egewh kah n6enz,\\ejip (subj. animate). . One, those which are two, " one of the two." •* xi. 29. Ke bahzegwe (indie.) . . she arose, xiv. 31. Pahzegweeg (imper.) . . arise (ye). V. 6. Shingeshenemd (subj. possess, case) . . as Ap lay. V. 3. Shingeshenooworf (subj.) . . were lying, ii. 22. Kah ooneshkoc/ (subj.) . . that he had risen. V. 8. 06ne8hk6n (imper) . . rise (thou), iii, 29. N^ahweA . . he standetA. viii. 9. Ke...n6bahweh . . she was standing, ix. 41. Ne wuhbemm . . we see. ix 1.5. Kah ezhe wahbirf (subj.) . . who thus saw. Wahbeyon (subj-) . . (and) i see. TIIK CKKI<: I.AN(i(;A(iK. :n liber md *a8 re iH ent, &c. loat. re, itch • I I«i» he is. A'pi)« hr Hit.«. I'l'iHsokMii he riHcv (fruiii u Hitting ponture). Piini.sHi/< he Wvs down. WiinncHkou) he rinet (from a recumbent posture). Nrpowow he Htan(i«. WiippM he secv. Scvhnoyiayoo he depurts. l'i'ni()ot«//(x> he vvulkj. I'iniethow he ftics. l'imcNkuu> he Hwims, us a fish. TluithAnww he swim*, as a man. Pim/isM he sail*. Kvwayoo he return*. Poothoo he cease* or leaves off. Nippdui he sleep*. Nippu he is dead. Etc'thetMm he so thinks, intends. Kiskrthetum he know*. Kiski.ssw he remember*. vii. 3. Muhjott (imper.) , . depart thou- xvi. 7. Che mahjaliyon . . :hat I depart. V. 8. PemoosajM . . walk n...hc puts it to, or with it (quasi, hea/*o-cth it). i m PREPOSITIONS. Ooche... o/^yrom, hif, also tvilh (instrument). Ooc//-eoo, (neut.)...he is, or proceeds, Jrotn. Odsetow (trans.)... he educes it, i.e. makes it. 0(}cAchayoo...he ym«-eth, hindereth him. 0()/inum...he /ro;«-hand-eth-it, i.e. takes it. Pceche... within, in the inside. Pt'e/enum...he puts it i'm. Pcdahum...he thrusts it in. P<^cc/eenum...he puts it in the inside. Uttamik ... underneath. 6/i{^amahum...he thrusts it under it. Sdpoo . . . through. «S'rfpoosoo...he ia passed //(roKg/i (e.g. by medicine) >S'apoonum...he puts it through. Kitheekow . . . among. Kitheek6wo7i»7n {act.)... he puts it among. TAkootch...upon. Kc gah tukootchesA-rfA raistik...he will mis-act (come) upon ifoii, the tree. Waska . . . around. Ne Waskdwt'M.../ surround, enclose it (by hand). Ne Waskan/ssoo« (refl.).../ surround myself (with some- thing). INTERJECTIONS. Interjections and intensive expressions also furnish Attributive Verbs. I ■' I ^^ THE CREE LANGUAGE. 35 Kceam !...very well ! be it so ! Keamtow, or Keea.meon>...he is still, quiet. Kbea.vausu...he is stilUish (not dimin.), tranquil. K(ieameewi3su...kc is peaceful (disposition). Awk and lee (leet before a vowel)... intensative prefixes. Awkoo...very strongly, Awkoo«u...he is very ill. lee... forcibly. Icet6w...he finns, fixe* it. Of the Root and Affix. The verb, even in its most simple state, intransitive as well as transitive, consists of two parts or members, namely, the Root, and the Affix, or characteristic ter- mination. 1. OF BEING. l'6w...he or il is. I is the Root, ow the Affix, and so of the rest. 2. OF CIRCUMSTANCE. S6y86yk-MM...i7 haiU. Thoot-iv ..it blow*. &c. &c. 3. OF QUALITY. Nuppack-mM.../..,/u' ts liatU'd. Niii)|)i'u'k-«7MH.../7 is j»rcasy. l'iiniiKr-H'miX)...//e/.vjrri'asi/-(v/ (Angl. — grrasod, anointed). V'unwwe-ud in/U(>...i( /,v giTas'/-f(/. I've. ni oot-rt jyoo. . . /ic walk.v. PvAnoot'Oi/magnn . . .it walk.v, progresses, goes, as a Miteli. i.. lie walk.v him. Peni6ot.v/()U'...Af progi'cssc//; //. Venwoti\'tiimagun...it progressr/// it. Vi\nmh^-ivc-h(ii/oa . . ./ic grens-i^-et/i him. Pininiee-T('c-/()H'...//(' grcas-i/-clh it, rm\mio-XiH''tiimagun...it grci\s-i/-cth it. I &c. Sic. 7. OF CAUSATION. Wrippo-/;(r(/()o...//r 7)takcs him see. W{lppe-t<»')i'.../iC inakcs it see. I TlIK CIIKK LAN(illA(JK. ;i7 itctl). ' IVmootay-Afiyw. ..//(,■ makes him walk. IV'in<)(»lriy/"W.../it' makes it go. V('nuyotny-t(imagun...il makes it go. Ac. &f. QSei' Accidence.'] Tlic Affix itself may indeed be considered, generally, as also (H)nsistiiigof two parts, namely, the uninjlected and the injUctcd. FiiisT, — It c()i\sists of the uninHeeted, or charac- teristic vociihla or vocables, indicating the mannkh of hcintj, doing, or acting, associated with the root, and is analogous in signification and use to the relative terms, or the conjugational or other forms, signifying to hci to do, cause, make, &c. of which more will be said hereafter. An enumeration of the consonants of the descriptive character alluded to, would extend to almost all that are found in the Cree alphabet.'* They especially rh. •s The Cree alphabet is of rather limited extent. The articulate sounds of which it is composed may he divided, as in European languages, into vowels ami consonants. The simple vowel sounds are coextensive with and enounced as those in the English language, e. g. a (Chip. =ah, Jones) as in far, the ItaUan a. a long. « as in awe, law, e as in me, see. i (=.u Jones) as a in fate, mate. i (short before a consonant) as in pin, thin. i before a vowel, or final i, is pronounced long, as in mine, thine {—ahy, Jones). as in so. () as in low (nothiglO, sown, own. no as in moon. :^ 38 A (JKAMMAn OK 1 chttracterizc the miiuorouH dass of derived transit ivcH, and may, in such cases, hesaiiUohave sonic wgcneml and some a special signification. I shall, for the pre- sent, confine my notice to the following, viz. /», /, wf, w, and th. And first of the //. and the t. The GKNEUAL causntive has for its endings (indie. 3 p. sing,) /jiiyoo and /ow, and for its constant charac- teristic, or energizing sign, the aspirate /* (anim.) and / (inan.) both of which, used in this sense, bvgin always an emphatic or accented syllable. (Chip. -{h)on, -toon or -doon.) I I Ws H final, as in pure, endure, or as the pronoun you. at and ny aa in fair, may, hay. Hut the Crce consonants have a loss extensive rauKc than tho Knghsh, and, strictly considered, shouUl perhaps be described as belongin^f to tho class denominated shari) consonants. nie labials arc p and «' (.oo) and their derivative nasal m. The/ and r arc wanting. The linguals are th (pronounced as in thin), t, s, st, ts, (/)e/j, and their nasal m (/ and rare wanting — wc Dialect). They have the guttural k also, to which must be added the aspirate h. I allude here to some of the tribes on the coast of the Hay ; those of the interior, as on tho Sas- kdtchetcun, &c. affect more the ./frt/ series, as th {in thi,s), I), d, z, j, ff guttural; as do the Chippeways also, as may be seen in the translation before mentioned. With all his acknowledged care, however, and general orthographical consistency, Mr. .loNKshas sometimes fallen into the use of one or the other of these kinds (in the same verb — in the same i)ar- ticle), as euphony seemed to guide him. It should be also observed, that, on the coast, sh is used for the s of the interior ; sh and zh are also very prominent in the Chippeway dialect. Sec Jonks's Translation. It may be proper to observe here that the three mutes, viz. the labial h, the guttural g, and the lingual d (the first three consonants of the Hebreiv, &c. alphabets), with th (which I assume to be their common Radix, Vide infra), are sometimes denominated in this treatise prjmi/trc consonants ; and their sharp cognates p, k, t, with the rest of the vocables Itclonging to these three several classes, are called their derimilives TIIK VliV.V. LANdllAdK. 39 l'i''ni()<)tiiyiH»...lu' walkH, progresHi'H. IVinootay-/(»...li(> niakuH or caiiscn liiiii la walk. IV'nio(»t,ay-/(')W...lu' atitxcH it Ut go, e.g. a8 a wutcli. W/ip|)-//...Iit» HoeB.'" VV(i|)|)('-A.'iy(K»...Iio causen liiiii to oc VVi'i|ij)i'-/nk...lM! iH wflrfc to wp, (by tiiiii or them, (leK). VVii|)pc-/('iw (iiian.)...lio chuxch it to hoc." (Sec Sec. 4.) The (!i5Ni':HAL/r«n.s/7ii;(?liuH the Hiuno cndin^H as the j^ciieml (;jiusiitivc just incntionod, vi/. Ajiyoo for the animntfi ohjcct, and tow for the inanimala object, but Ihjhtly accented in both genders. In this (comparatively) uneinphatic form, the consonants h and /, as well as those others of less general use hereunder mentioned, represent the mitigated verbal energy of the sini[)le transitive verb, as sometimes expressed in Englisli by do, make, -ate, -ize, -fy, and the prefix or the termination en, or by an ciiuivalent emphasis, ciiange of accent, &c. 'rii6skow,..i7 is 8oft. 'J'li68kc. Ko nahmahdahb('/<. . he sat down. vi. 10. Niihmahdahbe(//)?'A- (iinper.). . make them sit down- vi. ^t\. Clif [)cimhtcAdullii/(.hu tnakcs him angry, irri/(//«',v him. Kt't'8(juay(»o ../;<• is inline, mud. Kvi'S(piavAayoo...lie muddcN.s, niakcx hii\> mad. KiVs(pmypay(»o...//(' »,v drimk (iiusaiic with ch'inking). Kt'csquaypny//ayoo...lu' /wrbrirt/cs him, iiitoxif«/«'.v him. NippM...//t' is dead. S\\i\wwissu.../ic is doad-/(^c, nshnmod. Nipprwi7/ay(K)...he docs him lU'att-likc, iiiorli-j)/-vt\i him. Ki'oamiow'.. he is quiet. K6eamc/iayoo...lie quiets, tames, i)aei-/_V-eth him. Sakc/dayoo (.mim. object.)... he love* him. Suke/ow (inau. object.)... he Iovca- it.'^ 068e//ayoo...he make.v him. 06se/ow...he make.» it. Pem6ota//ayoo...he walkf/A him. I*enH'>otn/ow...he progress*'/// it. 19 V. 20. Oo zahkeon (inilic. aniin.) . . he lovcth him. xii. 25. Sahyahge/oo/i»//(M(uiiiiii.).../(c wrcNtluH, or hamllex niiidi, him, M6wiiti-lii7>»//or> ..he colloctH Ihetn. NM\vhaif(H)...hf workH (at) him. KwrtH8(7myfw.../«; jcrkH away, cnrrioH ofTHiKlduiily, him. I*issitclu!/mi/w).../i«,' noticcH him. KvccUch(ii/()o...hc lie^iiiH him. Kii'HCi'hny(Ht.,.he fniiHiioH him. V()OHvhayoo...h(: embarks him, Wi'ci\ggchayoo...hc waHtes, (lestroyH him. \'\\\niichch(iy(H)...he renders ii.sd'iii, him. Vryh(iijoo...hc waits (for) him. M('yelie/trt//«o.../«; consumes, exhausts, him. N\'if^fr»tc]nihnt/<>»...he meets, i.e. is aware of, him. V(il)iihaij(H)...hc lauf^hs at hiin. Nahni»v-«'lh him. Ni'iggn-/iiiu...l)«< It'll V -rill it. N«l>1-/f«y«M)...Iu> lVtj'li-r(l> liiui. N7iht-('nm...lif iWoli-olli it. (•ot»i<*/(iytHi...]ii> (Vtnrtli him. (!(Hts-/iim...lu' I'fjircth it. Oot('0t-^iy...ho loiu'h-oth. tittiiin-ctli (to) hint. Ootoi't-/iim...lit' ri\u"h«'th (to) it, mrivrlli .-it it. . Kot<>«)...A<' s|>i-/(iv.../<<" longs for fiim. l'iu"k>vah-/...A(' hati's /livi. Toot-/M»i (innn. ).../«• thu's //. Tt>ot-/(J«viV(X» (dat. )...//«• «loos it In liim. ^' X. \i. Oo mi\\ii,\\\ni)» . . he loavoth him or thrm. viii. ix. n;vl\gahnlituv;()()ii unv. inilic. dvtcrm ). . he was lofl Oni ll> iv. iii. Oo go niihgalu/oH . . he loft it. ^> i. '21. Kc okedoo (,nout. imlio. .inim.^ . . he lialh said, i. ;'wiit-^nti...lin lUiiaHNCH or Im'ii|>h it or llicrii to^rtlicr. K('>loo-/)iyoo. .lie iiiukrH a iioim' at liirii, i.e. he cliidrM liirn. K(Hoo-/ow...li(> siniiiils it, an a iiiiiHicat iiiMtniiiiriit. A (hii'd tnuiHllivji lorin Iuih lor iln vharnclcriHtir, m (luiiin.). niid f (iimn.) iiuikinf; -wmjon and -lum." WAp|»-»<...lio Hn'-i'tli. WA|)|m->/iayoo...lu' wt'-i-tli liiiii. Wri|i|ia-^iin...ii«> Hi'tsctli it. l)av\iv-miiifiHt..Jie U'lHHm liim. '\'{ikii-niii_ifiHt..,ht' Ntalm htm. VV(Tgi!c-7WHi/(«»...A(.' livcH witli him. \'mi\-viaiiiM>...hc ^iv<'H him t(» rat, \'wi\n liiiii. W(Ti»iiii-mrtyw. ../«.' lies with him or her, alfi<» figiirnt. \]Wv-muifm...hv. countH him. lJ'(;k(H)rlit'-wmfy«(».../it' HUHpcndH him in wattrr. MuHka-ma/ytMi. Ju: takim it iroin him, 'r/ilik(H)-JH«»/*«>,../!C ifl related to him. VV'.../«' Hits witli him, co-HitR him. W'\\K-vuiiiiH)...hc. ri;lati'H him. (A'tiioltim, iiiati.) 'rubuchi;-m((y(x>.../u'rclatuH, nurrutcH, him, circuiiiHtniitiAiiy.'" '' i. 2!). 47. Oo Ko wiMtuhinnu . . lie saw him (or Ihrrii). xi. 9. 0« wfilihuHf/oH . . he Huclh i7. ii. 21. Oo ^(ckdnerrtoM. . Ar knew llipm. ii. 2.''>. Oo gckdi?»(/rm . . hii knew »<. '^•» i. 34. NJft go (lcb{ihicm«A . . / liave related, narrated, him. vii. 7. M« del)khdoo(/on . . / narrate it. i. 1.1. Oo f^c debiihjemon . . he narrated him. V X\. Oo ^e tcI)uhdoo(/on. . . hi; narrated it. 44 A UKAMMAR OF Also, together with its coinpoinuls,'* 7/-iHheiimy so thinks it. As M6tho-othem«yo<* ..At' well-lliiiik.v, cstcnii.s, liim. Mi;tlio-etht'/«MJ .Jic approve.* il. Ki'ik-vthvtn(iij(K).,Jic kuows him, Mutli-t'thew«rt_(/0(>...//<' tlfapistw him. Pi98isk-(thewu/i/oo.../fC iioticcf him. Kimnaw-i'thcmfl^rx»...//t' keep*, takes eare of, him. Cl\eek-('tlie»)«//(w.../tc likes, values, hint. Ui)t()W-ethc/Hrt'//w.../tc l()ok.9 for, seek*, him. Kwaytow-ethemfl^oo...//c is at a loss wiiat to think of him. Mi'toon-i'tliemfff/j (inverse dcf ) . . Ae was mar- velled at {by him or them). vii. 21. Ke ge mahinahkahd-ainf/om . . ye have marvelled at it. vii. 43. Papahkon ke ahyen-anema/iU)od . . . 411. dilf-diHerently thty thought kirn. X. '24. Ka gwinahw-aindahnioo(/»)w/')»// (cans ,sul>j.) • . wilt tlmi' lack-to-think makr us. TIIK ( IlKK LANGU AUK. 45 / M.ilimrt(Miii-rtluvwrt;/w>.../ic rontcmpliitc.t him. Tiil)-i''thcv«rt/yw)...//(.' govcriw, diroftv, him. K'\tii:L'imk-6thcmnifuo..,hc iUinks him poor, conipastiioiiatcs him. MahmuHkat-othom»i/mi (act.) he thinks won'Jer, is nstuiUHhcd (at) him. Kist-i'thtvHrt(/oo...Ac thinkH much of, respects him. A fourth transitive form has w (anim.), and h (inan.), for its transitive signs, making -wayoo and -hum. Ootummu-wayoo ..he beat-eth him. Oot6mtna-/aim...h(' beat-eth it. (OotominahegguM...a hammer, tvmuhawk,) Prickama-it)ayoo...he knock-cth, cudgeUeth him. PiickaiTia-/aim...he kmu'k-eth it. (l*uckamoggun...a club or cudgel.) The inanimate gender of the following verbs also is formed by changing -ivayoo into -hum, Uckwi'uina»rflj/oo.../!e covers him. Vckv/\\nui\fium.../ie covers //. Kassea'flj/fw.../ie wipes him. K.AHsc/inm..,/u' wipes it. V'istnwai/(H)...hc mis-strikes him. U\^M\waij(H)...hc opens him. Kippau'flf/(w.. he shuts him. i^ otvwatjoo... he docs shovt of him. Niispitta»irt;/oo.../(t' resembles him. V(ittatv(iyoo...hc misses him, as in shooting, striking, &c. Kiskinahummajt'rt^oo...Ae shews, instructs, him. Pimmittissahn'rtyoo.../ie follows hitn. Piissistahu'flyoo.../!C whips him. K(ihookawmjoo...kc visits him. M(iy3ahwaijoo...he mends, patches, hitn. Nutt6powfl_yoo.../jc asks drink of him. ltissahu;fl_yoo (relat.).../ic sends him thither. Nahtau)flj/oo. .he fetches him (by water). Kittumu)ai/(w...//c finishes (eats up) him. [K\tfou\ inan.] I 46 A GRAMMAR OF Miakawayoo...he finds him. (Miskum, inan. obj.)'-'* Chkestawayoo...he pierces him. Pucku8t6weiuayoo...Ae puts him in the water. Mutchoostayu'a^oo...^e puts him in the fire. Kask^skatva^oo...Ae scrapes him. M6onaii;ayoo.../te digs him. 'Moowaifoo...he eats him (inan. obj. Meechu).^^ &c. &c. The last vocable to be noticed here, is that expres- sed by th, of more rare occurrence, as an energetic element, than perhaps any other. It appears, also, in primitive verbs at least, to be of a more feeble character. Wee/Aayoo (anim.)...he names him. Wde/um (inan.)... he names or tells it.^' Wee/ummawayoo (dat. case)... he tells it to him. 25 i. 45. Oo ge mekahwon [Cree, miskahwayoo] (indie, anim.) . . Ite found him. X. 9. Che mekung [Cree, miskaA] (subj, inan.) . . that he find it. 26 vi. 67. Amood (inv. subj.) . . {he) who eateth me. vi. 51. Mejid (subj.) . . if he eat it. vi. 23. Mejewod (subj.) . . that they did eat it. vi. 26. Ke mejeyai^r (subj.) . . that ye had eaten it. vi. 56. M&hjid (subj.) . . {he) who eateth it. [See Augment. Sec. 3] 2'' xvii. 26. Nin gah weendon . . 1 will tell it. iv. 44. Oo ge weendon . . he told it. iii. l\. Ne vfeexidahnon . . we (1. 3.) tell it. iii. 8. Ke tah Nireenda'A^een (neg.) . . thou canst not tell it. viii. 14. Ke dah weenAdhzenahwah (nig.; ye cannot tell it. xvii. 26. i^% ge w^endahmaAwo^ (dat.). . I have told it to them. iv. 39. Nin ge wdendahmo^i (inv.) . . he has told it to wie. iv. 25, Mregah we'endahma%oonoM (inv. 1.3.) he will tell jVto us. ii; 12. Ke yv6eniahm6onenahgoog (subj.) . . (if) / tell it to you. I THE CREE LANGUAGE. 47 &c. es- ?tic so, ble Meygu (accus.)...he gives him, or it.29 Mee//myoo (dat.)...he gives (it to) him (oblique sense in the direct form.) Also, h'thkyoo (anim.)...he places or puts him. * Astdw (inan.)...he places or puts it. This is a generic verb. Though irregular as to the root, it is, together with its compounds, regular in its inflections, following those of the form before mentioned, viz. hayoo and tow. U''ckoo//^ayoo...he hang« (places) him up. U''ckoo/ow...he hang« it up. Tuckoo/Aayoo...he on-puts, i.e. add* him. Tuckoo/ow...he add« it. I he 3] ^s i. 17. Oo ge megewam . . he has given it. iii. 16. Oo ge Mvgewanun (possess, case). . he has given his him. vi. 51. Ka megewayon (subj.) . . which I will give, vi. 33. Mcgewaid (subj.) . . (he) which giveth it. xiv. 27. Megewawod (subj.) . . (as) they give. X. 11. Oo megewatahmahwon (dat.) . . he gives it /or them. iii. 35. Oo ge mcnrfn . . he hath given (it) to him. X. 28. Ne menoff . . I give (it) unto them. iv. 14. Ka menu.9 (subj.) . . which I shall give (to) him. xvii. 2. Ke menud (subj.) . . (as) thou hast given (to) him. Che menod (subj.) . . that he give (it to) him or them. iii. 27. M4nind (inv. subj. indet.) . . that he be given fto). 20 (Chip. Ood' dhsdn, anim — Ood' ahtoon, inan.) xi. 34. Ke ahsai^r F (subj.). . ye have placed him? XX. 13. Ke khsahwahgwain (subj. dubit.) . . they have placed him. XX. 15. Ke khsahivahd(wttd)ain (id.) . . thou has placed him. ix. 15. Oo ge khtoon (inan.) . . he put, or placed, it. xiii. 4. Oo ge ahtdonun . . he h"d placed them, (garments), xix. 29. Ke ah piitK him into u lui^. A'88cwiit/('»>r...lu' puts it &r. Those cnrnjizitiij signs, however, thouj^h appeariiif; in many eases, wlien compared witli the Hlni^lisli cor- respontUni; terms, to he mere indications ol' transition, are oftentimes essentially disfinciivc, present ini; difle- rent moihfications of the action (piahfying the root, ;is (Vom Wccolir fusod in ntniposition )...«'////, ro-. \Vi rclK'-//.\V(>i)...lu' (V»-(>ju'ratea, co-actH him. \Vcoi'he-«'iiyt)o. . .h»' aci-omnanies liim. (Soo Sect. 3, Special Trans.) Wi\en the root and its elmracteristic ending; do not readily coak'see, as is frecpiently the case in derivative verhs, tliey are connected hy means of a vowel, wliieli is also sometimes distinctive, sometimes perhaps euphonic. In the following examples, the connecting vowel is distinctive. Nipp-iw... /(ic sliTp.v ; nipp-o-hay()o...l»c hills or puts 111 m to sli'op, (pj. he iMi-sUvps him (Kr. il IVvj-dort). \ipp-«...//f is tloail ; nipp-(l-hayoo...lu' iload-i'ns (kills) him. Of the inirnnsitivc veibs there are, as we liave already seen, several kinds. The following summary comprises the chief of their several terminations, with their modifications in the same (thud) person of the subjunctive mood, and in both genders. 1. SUBST.\NTIVE VERRS. AssinncoTiYW (suhj. -wit).. Ar /.vstonoy. ofstono, from axsin- ticc, a stoni>. AssimieoH'u/i (-wak )...»/ is of stone. rilK CIIKK lw\N(n;A(iK. 49 AflHiniiecvAfw (-.T^«^)...Htonu abounds. Mcchini-iippw(>o-A:m/w; (-A-a(7)...iiieat-li(|Uor (broth) makes- he. iiini. 2. ADJECTIVE VERBS. Tnkj.v«« {-is.\it)...he is cold (to the touch). Tt\koni (-()/c)...il is cohl. Kinww.v« (-sit)... he is loiijf, tall. Kinw«w (-t)lc)...ii is long. A'tluMnJ.vA« {-issil) he is difFicult, cross, perverse. A'tIi(Mnw« {-t)/e) it is diftieiilt, grievous, hard. Ki1euni-i.v.vtt {-issit)...he is trun(|uil, quiet. Keoamcwissu (-c'wi.isit)...he is of a peace/w/ diRposition. See Sec. 3, Augment. ACCIDENTAL (PASS.) VERBS. Kwi8k/.T.v(w (-?,v.foo<).. he is turn^e/ over. Kwiskc/^/yw {-etaik)...it is\,urned over. Makwoo.v(W (-soot), ..he is pressed. Mi'ikwoo/flz/fx* (-taik)...it is presserf. 4. IMPERSONAL VERBS. NopjH (-t'ek)...t< is suninuT. IV'pcHm (-k)...it is winter. Isputtitioji; (-ak)...t7 is a high hill. PimmichewM7< (-ak).. it flow*, a.s water. 5. NEUTER VERBS. These may be classed under seven conjugations. They take -magun in their inanimate form. £ r .\'|>|)» (-;/)... he sil.v. Ap|)o;m/i,'HW (-ni.'i;>;f//)...>V sit. v. AVIiroo (-»•/)...//(• niovr.v. Ai'ln''»/*/ifHM (-iniig<)/) if inovc.v. Ni|)|)('>u' {-(tl) ..he Hlofji.T. K>iski'th('t M;n (-( ua/i-n V)(> ((>inr liotiiro ii vowcb h<\ sfir, or »V. i)ini.',( r 1 U. \»»» t\o »i(MinhnwiAiiiiM , , wr would ^wiinl (d) hpo /(im v\M liV \iM lU^lxtnonioj; / novoin /Afm. \\>' ,!(>. \«» n;c wocndahiuahwdc; . / Imvo UAA (\{ io) them. \vi\i. '21). i\iti ^0 gi«l\r>i>iii>WiH\p\i\(i(; . I 'iiivo lu'pl. tiikiMi cuii' nf Ihrm \ l(i \)>i fi^h W\\o has said u>nto> mi". v\> 7. .V<° ^hi^Mijjatxoiun;!)!)*/ . »/ haloth m". v»\i. IS. \»« dohahjoiiuy . . hr iianatos me. \\i. 'J(> i\i» gah iioo|ioiiahi\t_i; . hr shall follow mr. \\\. 4i>. XiM go nuni<7. ''f l>ath givon (,lo^ mr. \>u. JiV ■Virny oodahpon«(7 . . hr takoth mr. \v. -2^. \»»i gah wooiidahni(i7«/o(>M()(» . . hr will tell us -'^ v. 4.'i. .\»M gah almahiuoiuf (;()()»()» . . hr will nccuso us (\. '.\.) viii v. \i» go epoonnn . . hr has said to us (\. :\.) X. '27 y'f noo\\c\\i\\\\\r!}oo(' (ilir). ./ «(•»' /li III. N, I A|(|ifiiii»7( (iiiv). (h/il, nil vcdc, mv nvi'-v\\i-hi') lir nvv -Ptl I mr. S(i iiIh«» will) llic hcimumI ihthoii, Kv, hh Ac iiii/(»iii (\\u.)...tlniii ((•l.(li«'Ht-/« hv ('iIcIioh //»t. " AV w/i|t|iiiiiw)Ni (ilir.).. V//OH mTHf-/»m. AV wAiipiiniiA (inv. liiil. // wih. ..Ilirvwv\\\-lir), hi- hvch Oirr. IMMIU r " ix, llTi Kr' Ki|twiiyAiii"tn«// . . Ilnni lirlicvr'il fini) /(i/h viii. r»7. AV k(i vvlililMiliiiwf/( . . fliiiii liiiHt. Mfcii //rw. IV. 10, A'f lull i^i- {fmhioliiliiiiiihwiih (diil.) . , ///o« tiii){lili'Mt liiivc ii-iltrd il of /)(/;). \. M). Kill' vuiihii'iili . . iji' Riiy (of, cir In) him. siv. 7 A'c lu> v/l\\\\m\\u\iihitmh . . yi' liiivc Mtu-n /«(/«. A'f k('kftnnriirf/(H)»/( . . i/r- know h'im. vii. '^7 A'c k)<(» you. viii. .'13. ;W». A'c ^iili prdij^cdcncc/oow . . tbry il'r. on) will hc.I, yon free. xii. '.Ut. Kv \vr'\i'Wi'i/i)iiiiiihwiili . . il ii('con)|i;inicl.li yim. xvi. II. A'c^ali wiilil»Miidiilic//f(«H)«A . . Ac will hIiow if to ?/o« xvi. 2',\. Kr (^ali wvwi/noiviih . . hn will j^ivc it to yon. XV. '20. A'c^fdi ko()duli(.{e(//)c(/oo?«07 . . tlwy will (KirHcriitc you. XV. '21. A'c jrali (oonjc) luiuhihyoownr/ . . Iki'y will do to you xvi (■). A'c iiiooNlik('niiN|ik'/7///oonr//iu;r/// , . il lillcth you. 54 A UUAMMAK «»!• 2. The second person (AV) always stands before the {si« fetchost-Mic. Ke n{i(iltin (\\\\.)...Cthce (etch-I) I letcli thcc. Ke wAppaini/i ((lii'.)...//(OH secst mc, Kc wAppiuiwV/j» (lUil. li vc'(l«...///a' sec-/) / hoc IIwc. 1 .' ! I ti! ■1 UIKKCT. ^' xxi. 15. Ke siihgrA ? . . thou lovcst mc. xvii. G. A'e kc mdcnsA . . thoxi hast given (to) me. xiii. 36. fve (^ah noopcnujA . . thou sliaU follow me. ivii. 24. Ke siihgf'A. . thou lovesl; we. vii. 28. Ke kckivnemtm . . ye know me. V. 40. Ke tah ge tiipwatahwim . . yc would havi* helicvcd me viii. 21. Ke gah undahwuncinm . . ye will seek inc. viii. 49. Km biihiJcnooiirihwim. . yc dishonour (laugh af.) me. xiii. 13. AV(/' czhcnckuhzhjwi . . j/c call (name) me. xiv. 19. Ke wahhahmim . . ye see me. XV. 27. Ke gah tebahjcinim . . ye will relate me. xvi. 16. Ke kah wiihbahmtm . . ye will see me. A'e kah wAhbahmeseem (neg.) . . ye will not see me. XV. 27. A'eke (be-oonje) wt-jewjm. . ye have (hitherto) accoini)anied me. INVKUSE. xvi. 25. Ke ke kekanemm. . thee have known-/, and so of the rest, / have known thee. i. 48. A'e ke wiihbahmiH . . / have seen thee. xi. 27. Ke tuj)wayiineini« . . / believe on thee. iii. 1 1 . Kef enm . . / say (to) thee. xiv. 12. and iv. 35. KeJ* ene/jim . . / say (to) you. xiii. 34. A'e me'nenim. . / give (to) yoti. iv. 38. Ke ke ^hnoonen/w . . / have sent you. vii. 33. Ke wejeweMim . . / accompany you. vii. 37. A'e kckanemenim . . I know you. xvi. 22, A'e gah wahbahuuni'm 1 will sec you Tim CUKK LAN(JUA(il-: 55 . i In tlu' nrcccdi )lcs, til ill cxain|)ics, tlu; grainmiiiicai position of the pcr.sonal sij^ns remains the same, althouj^li tlic (al)l)rcviatc(l) pronouns Nc J and Ke tliou, be nomi- native and accusative, ovauhjoct and object, alternately. ►So also with the oblinoonim . . / go prej)are it for you. xiv, 3. A'hwe wahwazhetaAmoono'A^oo^ (subj.) . . (if) I go prepare it for you. xviii. 39. Che bdhgedinoAmoonaA^roo^r (subj.). . that /loose him to you. NEGATIVE DIRECT. ii. 24. Oo ge b&hgedmahmahwdhs^m . . he did not loose it (his body) to them. iii. 11. Kef ootkhbenahmdhwes^min . .. ye take it not to (from) us (1. 3.). iii. 32. Oof ootahpendhmahwdhs^en . . he taketh it not to (from) him. viii. 50. Nin' undahwaindaAma'Ade^oose (refl.) . . I seek it not to my- self xvi. 23. Ke gah xxndoodahmdhweseem . . ye will not ask it to (of) me. xviii. 38. xix. C. Ne inekahmahwdlise . . I findtV nat to (in) him. NEUTER. xi. 50. Neboc'aAiforf (subj.) . . if he die for them. xi. 51. Che ne\]ootahwahnid (id. possess, case) . . that he die/or them. xvi. 2. Nind' ahnookuiaAwaA . . J work /or him (he will think). TUK (RKK LANGUAGE. 57 it I i i in the Affix, and that in the latter tliis relational nign is conse(juently disjoined from its regimen, the pro- nominal prefix. The remark may be extended to tiie auxiliary particles, e.g. ghee (= Ice, or ge Jones) " have," ga (= gah, or kah, Jones) " shall or will," &c. which, in both these forms, always retain their place before the verb, Ke ghee natamowin (see p. .')■'>)... thou hast fetch-it-for-me. Ke ghee natatnatin (id.)... thee have fetch-it-for,-I. The exception, here exenipUfied, to the rule laid down of the affix being the general vehicle of the personal accidents of the verb, extends, as already stated, to the indicative mood only. In the imperative and subjunctive moods, all the expressed pronouns accumulate in the affix. See paradigms of the verb. The third persons, subject as well as object, are, in Cree as already intimated, expressed in the inflected part of the Affix in both the direct and inverted, or (as regards this " third" person) active said passive, forms, as, Pi\pe/[fl?yoo.../ie laughs at him, or them (definite). VaTpehik...he is laughed at by him or them, (definite.) Tepwa/rt_yoo...Ac call* aloud (to) him. Tvpwitik...he is calle(f to by him, &c. (def.). Kixhtayoo...he hides him. Kahtik...he is hidd . lie was come to Iii/, [Note. — With respect to the personal pronouns, it may be proper to remind the reader that, between the first person pUiral, and the second and third persons plural, there is this material difference to be observed in their grammatical value. Tlie second person plural comprises two or more second persons exclusively. The third person plural, in like manner, two or more third persons. But the first person plural is necessarily a combination of different persons, namely, of the first person singular with eit/ier of the other iwo (viz. second or third) persons — hence the English plural pronoun, we, used to signify, indifferently, / and thou (or I and ye), and / and he (or I and they), becomes, in all its cases, and also in its possessive pronoun, equivocal, and its precise meaning must be sought for in the tenor of the discourse, or the explanation of the speaker, as " We praise thee O God." " Our father who art, &c." " Forgive us our trespasses." " And they said unto him, we are all one man's sons ; we are true men," &c. Gen. xhi. 11. Again " And they said one to another, we are verily guilty concerning our brother, in that we saw the anguish of his soul when he besought us and we would not hear, therefore is this distress come upon us." In the last of these examples, it is evident that the pronouns we, us, our, include the first and second — in the otliers, the first and third persons. In the Algonquin dialects, this ecpiivocal manner of expression is avoided by the use of a separate term for each of these two combinations, namely, Nethanan, equivalent to the English wp, signifying / and he, &c. ; and Kcllidnow, equal also to we when implying / THE CREE LAXGUAGE. 61 ' thoti, &c. and /, or the first and second persons. Tlie same distinction is maintained through all the forms of the verbal inflection, and also of the possessive pronoun. It is generally indicated in this work thus, (1. 3.) and (1. 2.). Tiie grammarians of the South American lan- guages denominate these two forms, the exclusive and the inclusive, with reference to the person addressed.] These plural augments, or affixed syllables, of the simple personal pronoun, when in combination with a verb in the indicative mood, constitute, with the excep- tion of the third person in some cases, the verbal affix, or at least a part of it, the (abbreviated) singular form only, being prefixed. Ne natanfl?i (dir.)...we (1.3. i.e. first and third persons) fetch him. Ne nutikoo7ia» (inv.) ..he fetches us {I. 3.). Ke lidtanow (dir.) ...we (1. 2. i.e. first and second persons) fetch him. Ke nktikoonow {inv.). ..he fetches «* (1. 2.). Ke nksinan (dir.)... thou fetchest m* (1. 3.). Ke ivdtiUinan (inv.) ..we (1. S.) fetch thee. Ke natwbwinnan (dir.). .thou fetchest him^r wj (1. 3.). Ke natwatinnan (mv.)...ive (1. 3.) fetch him for thee. Ne natowuk (dir.).../ fetch them. Ne naXawidnuk (dir )...n)e (1. 3.) fetch them (double plural), Ne nitikoonanuk (inv.)... they fetch tis (I. 3.). (id.) Ke naiandnink (dir.) . we (1. 2.) fetch them, (id.) Ke nktikooHowuk {in\ ).. .they fetch us (1. 2.). (id.) Ke niitwowinoujow (dir.) . . .i/e fetch him for me. Ke natwatino/io«» (inv.).../ fetch him for you. sa 35 The Chippeway is not, in this point, closely imitative of the Cree dialect. In the intransitive form, the " constant" iv of the plural any. t M G2 A GRAMMAR OF h J I 1: The same observation may be made with respect to the intransitive verbs, as, Indie. iVie p6mootan.../ walk. Ke \i6mootan... thou walkest. Pemootayoo ..he walks. PemootaywiagMW (inan.)... it walks. Nc pem6otan7jan...«;e (1. 3.) walk. Ke pem6otanfl7Jon;...we (l. 2.) walk. Ke pdmootanowon» . ^e walk. P^mootayw'MA: (oo-\-uk)...They walk. Pemootay>nrtg?t (to) me. XV. 16. Ke ke wahwanahbahmeseeni . . ye have not chosen me. xvi. 5. Ked' ezhe kahg^vajemejeem . . j^e so ask me not. [xvi. 16. Ke gah wahbahmim (posit.) . . ye shall see me.] xvi. 10. Ke wahbahmejeem . . ye see me not. xvi. 16, 17' 19. Ke gah vvahbahmeseem . . ye shall see me not. vi. 26. Kec^ (oonje) undahwah';ii.iiese«» . . ye (because) seek me iiot. xii. 8. Ked' ahyahweseem . . ye have me not. vii. 34. Ke gah mekahweseem . . ye wU not find me. viii. 19. Ke kek^nemeseem . . ye know me nof. iii. 11. Kef oot&hpenahmahwesemira (dat.). .yetake not to (from) us. INVERSE. viii. 11. iTe nahneboora^senooB . . thee condemn not I, i.e. I condemn thee not, and so of the rest. xi. 40. Ke ke en^senoon . . I have not said (unto) thee. xviii. 26. Ke ke wahbahm^senoore . . I have not seen thee. vi. 70. /fe ke wahwknahbahmesenoonm . . I have »iof chosen you. xiii. 18. liCef' en^ne«e«oonim . . 1 say it not (to) yo«. xiv. 27. Ked' ezhe m^nesetwomm . . ^ so give not (.unto) you. F ■ I r! 66 A GRAMMAR OF xiv. 18. Ke kah ezhe n&hgahn^moontm . . / will not so leave you. xvi. 4. Ke kew^endahin6osffloontm . . J have not named them to you. XV. 15. Ked' ezhenek&hnesendonim . . / call, name, you not. xvk 26. Ket* eninesen^onim . . I say not (to) you. ADJECTIVE VERBS — POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE. V. 30. (yonesheshi'rt ..it is good, " just." V. 10. O'onesheshinsenoon ..it is not good, " lawful." vi. 63. Enahbdhd&hsenoon . . it is not useful, " proflteth not." ACCIDENTAL (PASSIVE) VERBS. XX. 7. Er !i Mdig (subj.). . there, (where) it was placed. XX. 7- Ke dali^ >o-ahtasenoon . . it was not on-plac«2, added to. xix. M. '.'he a '.ooddsenoog (sulij.). . that they should not be, " re- aiair. " hung up. NEUTER — ANIMATE. vii. 8. iVe we ezhahse . . J want (to) gj not. xviii. 20. Nin ge ekedoose . . I have spoken not. xviii. 17. Nind' bhvrese (vide infra.) .. I amhe not. xviii. 17. Ked' ahwese , . thou art he not. vii. 1 . We pemoosa«e . . ke wants (to) walk not. vii. 52. Pe-oondahdeze*e . . he hither-from proceeds (comes) not, ir. 3. Ke mahje-ezhechegase . . he has ill-done not. ix. 4. Tah ahnookese . . he wU not work. xi. 9. Tah bahketashiBze . . he will not fall. xi. 21. Tah ge neboose . . he would not have died. xi. 56. Tah be-ezhrfAse . . he will not hither-go (come). xvii. 12. WahneshiBze . . he has not gone a'vr ay, lr~:' himsv,>lf (not reflect.). xxi. 11. Ke bekooshka^se . . it has not broke;.. viii. 48. Nind' ekedoosemtn ..we (1. 3.) say not. iv. 35. Ked* ekedooseem . . ye say not. \v. 48. Ke tah tapwayaindahreem . . ye would not believe. vii. 22. Keke (oonje) ezhechegiseem. . yehavenof (therefore) done it. vi. 36. Ke tdpwayaindahzeem . . ye believe not. viii. 21. Ke gah kahshketooseem . . ye will not succeed. Mi. oyou. THE CREE LANGUAGE. ix. 18. Ke t&pwat^iuetoii^ .. ^Aey have no/ believed. X. 28. Tah n&36osewug . . they shall not die. xii. 9. Ke b^-oonje-ezh&hfeuw^. . they have hither-therefore-go (come) not. xvii. 14. tehixadbiigooi4i8e)wug . . they are not governed, xviii. 28. Ke p^endeg^ewt($f . . they have 710/ entered. (Subj. ana Jmperat. vide infra.) re- Cnot INANIMATE — POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE. i. 38. 41. ix. 7- XIX. 37. 'E'kedoomahgud . . it saith. vii. 42. Ke ekeddomahgdhsenoon . . it hath not said. V. 32. T&p\v&mahgudenig (possess, case subj.). . that it is true, viii. 13. T&Tpv/amalydhsenoon . . it is not true. xvi. 32. A''hzhe . . t&\igweahen6omahgnd already. . it arrives. vii. 6. ii. 4. TahgweshenoomaAjrti^enoon . . it arriveth not. xii. 24. 'S^6omahguk (subj.) . . if it die. xii. 24. Heboomahgdhsenoog (id.) ..if it die not. The particle " kah" or " gah," constantly occurring in Mr. Jones's " Translation," is of a three-fold character : 1 . It is a negative, " no," or " not," and governs the indicative mood. (See Note, p. 63.) 2. It is a pronoun relative, (who, wliom, which,) and refers to a definite antecedent ; in this relation it governs the subjunctive. 3. It is an auxiliary of the future. Indicative. See Syntax. Section III. Of Primitive and Derivative Verbs. iit. Paragraph L Derivative verbs are, in the Cree language, of several kinds ; the component parts of the simple or primitive verb, namely, the attribute, the action, f2 68 A GRAMMAR OF i and the personal accidents, being severally and sepa- rately, susceptible of various modifications. I shall divide them into two classes, as follows : — The first class of derivative verbs includes those of which the modification of the root qualifies or changes the nature or meaning of the attributCy and which will be noticed hereafter. The second class comprizes those verbs which are varied in their forms by accessory modes of INTENSITY, of MANNER, Or of RELATION, aS 1 . Of Intensity, as Augmentatives, &c. ; the special transitive forms ; and the indeterminate and indefinite, as distinguished from the determinate and definite personal and impersonal accidents. 2. Of Manner, as the transitive and causative forms. 3. Of Relation, as the direct and oblique cases of the personal pronouns, as they are inflected with the intransitive, transitive, reflective, and reciprocal forms. These varied forms compose a numerous list of derivative verbs, which are all referrable to their several conjugations. We propose to exemplify them (3d pers. pres. indie.) in the following order : 1 . Augmen- tatives, &c. 2. Transitive, &c. Verbs. 3, Reflective and Reciprocal Verbs. 4. Special Transitives, and their Reflectives. 5. Indeterminate and Indefinite Verbs. G. Oblique Cases and their Reflectives. 7. Genders. THE CREE LANGUAGE. 60 AUGMENTATIVES, &c." 'Sippdtv...he sleeps. Nipp^w^u...he sleeps very frequently. NS nipp6w...he sleeps tvith iteration, (indef.) Nd nipp6w...he bleeps at times, distributively. Nipp^u...Ae sleeps a little. Nil nipp(2«u...^e sleeps a little, now and then. '1 37 iii. 4. Tab p^endega . . shall or will he enter, xviii. 38. Ke zdhgahum. . he went out. X. 9. Tah bdhheendega, kiya tah sahzahgahum , . he shall go in {with repetition), and he shall go out, with repetition (indef.). ii. 15. B&hzhahnzha^gun (Cree, Pdssistah^ggun) . . a whip, xix. 1. Ke })aAp&hshonzhawo(2 (subj.) . . they wAt-whipped him. iii. 13. Ke ezhe oombeshka/tse . . he has not so ascended. i. 51. Tab t^oj/uombesbka/iwun kiya tab hh-nahnahzhewun (possess. case) . . theij shall ascend {with repetition), and they shall descend (with repetition). iii. 5. Oo ge gahnoonon . . he answered him. ~ ' XX. 18. Ke AaAkabnoon^^ooc^ . . that he (or she) was said to by him {with repetition.) X. 25. WazbetooyrfAnm . . which I make, (indef.) xiv. 3. Abwe wahwizhetahmoondhgook . . if I go make, intensively, i.e. prepare, it for you. X. 1. Fahkon .. different. vii. 43. Pabahkon ke a%enanemabwod . . di-differently they thought (of) him. (indef.) V. 8. Pemoosam . . walk thou. iv. 6. Ke pep6moosaid ..&a he had been walking. viii. 52. Ke n4hooh . . he has died. iii. 18. NflAnebooaAse (anim.) . . he is not (quasi) condemnec^. iii. 17. Che nahn&ioondung (inan.) . . that he condemn it. xii. 0. Po/tpahmanemod . . that he thought about him or them. vii. 20. Babah-undah-n^siA {Cree, -isk). . who about goeth (to) kiU thee. 4 '4 70 A GRAMMAR OF Th()8pIsu...Ac is gentle. Th6sp\s6n)isu...he is of a gentle disposition {habilual. Angl. 'Otis). Kithd8ku...Aeliea. Kith&&\asku...he lies vertj qften. ^^ Ka kith&8ku...Ae lies mith iteration, (indef.) KAV.\t\iks)dsku...he \ies with iteration and very frequently. AngL, He is a very great liar. K^etimM...^e is lazy, idle. Kii k^etimu.../ '^ m o cS\ % %>^' 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. MS80 (716) 872-4S03 <.6 cS\ t> 72 A GRAMMAR OF h ■'! r J-it-tootum...he does it ttrongly, finnly, yrith constancy. I-it'astdw...he places Ujinn. /-it>uppu...Ae sits Jirm. /-it-uskittoiP...Ae sets it up ^rtn. /•it-titton>.. he finns, fixes t/. I-it*appe/ufn...Ae ties it Jirm, securely. (See Relative verbs.) (Frcm Niee, exactly.) NS it-too^m...Ae does it exactly. NS app«...Ae sits carefully. Na taton>...he places it carefully, in order. Ni kpu...he sees mell, has a keen sight. Ng it-tutn...he hears well, acutely. Ng it-tfggittu (anim. a person)... Ae is of the exact size. NS Acli.etum...he counts them carefully. &c. DtMINUTIVES.~-IMPERSONAI. VERBS. Mi»poon...tV spowj. Mlap6osin...it snow« a little. V€edidfv...it is far, a great distance. 'P6echdsin...it is fax-ish, rather far. Kinmiewun...t^ rainr. Kimmevf(issin...it rains a little. \ &c. ' - i. 'i ADJECTIVE VERBS. Mi8shigittu...Ae is large. Mi8shigitiissu...he is largish, rather large. M.isa6m...it is large. 'Missdsin,..it is largish. Mithkoora ...he is red. ' 'Milibkoosissu...ie is red-ish. Mithkw(}w ..it is red. Mithkw^«i»...t/ is red-ish. NEUTER VERBS. Pemootayoo...^e walk*. T^mooc]\dysu...he walk* a liltlc 4rc» THE CREE LANGUAGE. 73 M^che8...Ae eaU. > a, i Mkches(hsu,..he eats a little. 1 1 ill '41^ Some verbs have only the intensive (repetitive) fonn, as, As-asoo...he is tattooed. Pd-^cheoo...he is slow, tedious. >■■ ' Wit-yr6pe-^^tha...it swings, oscillates. T^-tippe-p .t*|i,«(f(V>»r, v. f-,r>,, <,yui,Vf<*« P^poo/t...f7 is winter. Fepoonissu.. .he ■winters. N^pm...t/ tf summer. 'S6]pinissu...ke summrrf. W&pu»...t/ is day-light. Wkpdsu.,.he is esaly (riser). Fr. il est matina^ &c. We now proceed to the consideration of that part of our general subject which constitutes the distin- guishing characteristic of the American languages generally, namely, the transitive verb. It may just be observed of the Cree intransitive, that its conjuga- tional form has, in the indicative mood, the prefixed nominative of the French ; and, in the suhjunctivef the inflected personal termination of the Italian and Latin, and that both moods have the augmented plural of all those languages (see Paradigms of the verb). So far, therefore, the structure of this part of speech may be said to have an analogy with at least some European tongues. But the transitive verb goes beyond this point. Retaining the European conju- gational forms, it assumes an additional feature of its own, adopting into its inflection all the relations of its regimen. Besides the subject or nominative before mentioned, it combines with the action — ^it engrafts on the intransitive verb both the ohject and the end — in other words, the direct and oblique cases of the 78 A GRAMMAR OF pronoun, in the several modes of determinate^ indeter" minate, and indefinite, as regards both the subject of the verb, and its regimen^ and in the active BXidpassive^ animate and inanimate forms. The developement and exemplification of these important points will form the subject of the remaining part of this Section. Cree transitive verbs are of two kinds — the one consists of those verbs which are transitive primi' tively, or in their most shnple form. These constitute a numerous class, and are such as the following. A'thdyoo (irreg.) . he places him. 16oKffwayoo...he does (it to) him. M^thoyoo ..Ae gives (it to) him. 0'vf6eoo...he uses it. K6echehai/oo ..he begins him. Kkeaeehayoo...he finishes him. "Mdomdyoo (irreg.) ...he eats him. M^echM (irreg.)... Ae eats f/. &6. The other kind, which it is intended to bring parti- cularly under notice here, consists of those transitives which are derived from the various kinds of intransi- tiveSy namely, substantive, (see p. 18 et seq.) adjective, accidental, and neuter verbs. These furnish a numerous list of derivative transitive verbs. We shall divide them into two classes, as follows : 1. General, or those in which the " characteristic" letter or sign of the action connecting the attribute with its personal accidents, is indicative of simple transition, &c. THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 79 2. Spbcial, or those in which the action has a spemZ form and signification. Of the several modifications of the intransitive verh, indicative of simple transition^ the most general definite termination is, as already noticed (see p. 39 et seq.), -hay 00, animate, and -toWy inanimate. The fol- lowing are given as additional examples of this kind. The most simjple form of the transitive, is where the verb is combined with a definite object, represented by a personal pronoun, or its sign, in the accusative case. {Note. — ^The third person, present, indicative, is given as the conjiiga- tional root, on account of its general uniformity and susceptibility of Rule, as regards the other personal inflections, &c. There is no infinitive mood in the Gree or Chippeway dialects, its import being resolved into the iubjunctive. See SyntaxJ] ADJECTIVE VERBS. V^6vfeotv...it it circular. 'W6vreha]foo...he romideth him. 'W6yfeton>...he rounde/A tV. Wdtiidtv...it is hollow. WdtheAayoo.../...Ae hoUoweM it. W&gom...it is crooked. \VSigehayoo...hehendeth him. W&getow..,he bende/A it. A'wkoosit ...he is sick. A'vflioohayoo...hehurteth him. S^gissu...he is afraid. S^gehayoo...he frighteneth him. A^themuftt. .he is difhcult. A'themehayoo...he perplexe//t, embarrasse/A Atm. J^i39eeyrunktissu.,.he is vicious, bad (conduct). Nisseewun^cheAa^oo...Ae vitic^^es, spoils, Atm. m A GRAMMAR OF ! Pem&t»rra...Ae w alive. l?em&diehaifoo...he makes him live, aavea hit life ; quasi, he enUyen* him. . . &c. (occAiiosAL or) accidental verbs. l8-p(ithu...t< so move/A. (See p. 82 and Reiative Verht.) l8-p(itheAayoo...A« so moveM Aim, (suddenly). Is-p{ithe/ow...Ae so moveM tV. (id.) &c. NEUTER VERBS. * N(ppu...Aet« dead. .^- uv NippaAayoo...Atf killf^A Aim. Goost^hu...Ae is afraid. G6o8tayoo...Ae fearf Aim. Goost&cheAayoo...A« terri/?dA Aim. T r W6eche-p^etw&m(fyoo (trani.) ...he smokei with him, co- amokes him. ♦• ' ■ , ' ' 'i N6onu...^e sucks. ii6othai/oo...she iJicliles him. I'tootayoo. . . he goes there. lt6otahdyoo...he carries or conveys him thither. Itti88awayoo...Ae sends him. Kevf-ayoo. . . he returns. Keyrky-tahdyoo.,.he returnn him, conveys him back. Kewky-tissa-yfdyoo...he sends him back. K6yfay-hoo...he returns (by water). K6^ay'hoothdyoo...he returns him (id.). Wdthaw«eoo...Ae goes out Wuthaw&y ^aAcfyoo ..he conveys him out. Wuthaw%ti8san/df^oo...Ae sends Aim out. K6osTpu.., he goes inland (from river or lake). Kooapetahdyoo...he conveys him thither. N^sepayoo...Ae goes to the river, &c. Sksepkytahdyoo...he conveys him to the river, &c. Wo«oo...^c covers himself. Pist&u'ayoo...he mis-strikes him. P\8t&hoossoo...he mia-sirikes himself. 5 'W6ethdyoo...he names Aim. W(:ethissoo...he name himself, tells his name. Note — See Reciprocals of the above forinH, p. 84. teif. iway. yself. i. 22. Ayen&lijindezdoyun {Rat vowel). . which thou sayest (oO thi/se{f. viii. 53. X'hyihwe^dezooyun . . whom thou makest thyself. ' vii. 18. Tahh^iyind^zood (flat vowel). . he that narrates, relates, himst^. XI. 44. T&hkoobe2oo xvi. 19. Ke kahgwdjtnt^m . . ye ask one another. THE CRBB LANGUAGE. 85 Is. ve or "the •' he to be sleep. I atheVi S A'aaamittdouk... they give one another food. 4i Vckv/imnahoottdouk... they cover one another. 5 Vf€ethitt6ouk... they name each other. RECIPROCAL, ANIMATE AND INANIMATE.*^ ^'iigg,e-skowdyoo...he meets him. N 'dgge-skdmagun ...it meets it. ^"^gge-skootdtoouk (anim.)... they meet each other. "S Agge'Skootdldomagunwd (in&n.)... th^ (things) meet one another. V. 1. Ke vriqaorUkwug . . they feasted one another. vii. 35. Ke et^u^ . . they said one to another. zix. 24. Ke ei^uff . . they said one to another. xiii. 22. Ke kahkahiiah.w&hbvindewug . . they looked (wt7A repetition) at one another. xi. 47. Ke mahwunj e^ciewu^ . . they collected one another, xix. 24. Ke mdbdahoone [|N&t-ayoo ..^e fetches ^ini.^ 'SitBi-wayoo...he fetches him, by water. fto< ' • , -- -fawdyoo, -faMm. Nuppdcke*faA2£m...Ae flattens it by hammering or striking. Tus8W^ga-toAt^m...Ae opens t7 out, expands it, id. S6ekwa-toAt-raiu-eth you, i.e. rains upon you. &c. Ne kissewSLskuttay-skakoon (inv. inan.) ... ii gives (ffiw« causelh) me the cholic. fifie-skawdyoo...he mis-s\iates him. Anglic^, he dis-places him. 0'ose-skaTvdyoo...he mis-removes, starts^ him (an animal). Thkke-skatvdyoo...he fnt«-.pushes him, i.e. accidentally. K6oak6o-skawdyoo he mis-shakes, jogSj him (e.g. as a person writing). A^wkoo-skan)dyoo...he hurts Aim, inadvertently. Koot\ip]pe-skawdyoo ...he upsets him, accidentally (as in a canoe). Nissewun4te-«£um.. despoils it by accident, Weethepe-f^um ...he soils tV, id. *8v. 14. Ke kah dongesA^tf A^oon (inv.) . . t^ will mw-come upon thee. xiii. 27- Oo ge p^endegasA^cfA^oon (id.) . . he was mw-entered by him. xii. 35. Ke kah ^ah-t&hgooneshkdhgoonahwdh (id.) . . it will mw-come upon you. xvi. 6. £^e m6oshkena«^^<^Ajroona%w(^A (id.) . . it mu-filleth you. XX. 25. Ke bahgoona^MaVtjrooc^ (id.) . . that he was mts-skinned by them. xviii. 4. Wah b4hgahmesAA((%oq;in (id.) . . by which he should be mts-struck. XX. 25. Kah eneshkdhgood (id.) . . as A« was mt«-done to, injured, by them (the nails). xviii. 28. Che w6neshkdhgoowod (id.) . . . that they should mis-be de- filed. 1 1 90 A GRAMMAR OF Kipe-skum...he throws it down, id. as from a shelf. I S6ke-skum...he spills it, id. ' K6we-«i(«m...Ae prostrates t/, id. Peekoo-fAum...Ae breaks t7, id. Takoo-skum... he treads on it, id. &c. : -mayoo, -un . . who can convince me. THE CR£E LANGUAGE. 91 QS{lkoo-Aayoo...Ae overcomes, subdues, Atflt.3 Skkoo-mdyoo ..he conquers him by speech, convinces him. Sakooche-mayoo...he persuades, prevails on, him. Wunne-mayoo... (wunne, infinite)... he perplexes, confounds, him. . ' '- W6esi-mayoo...he invites him to accompany. P&piase-ma^oo Qpapu, he laughs3...Ae jokes, diverts, him. QNepewe-Aayoo.../{e shames Aim by conduct."^ Nepewe-»iflyoo...id., by speech. K&ega.-mayoo...he scolds him. M& metho-ma^oo...he speaks well of him. Kipp6eche-ma_yoo... Ac stops, silences, him. T^Lkwd-mayoo (anim.)...Ae holds him in his mouth. Tukwa-/um (inan.)...Ae holds it in his mouth. Mkkwd-mayoo (anim.) ...he bites Aim. Mkkvfk-tum (inan.)...Ae bites it. Kissee-mayoo...he affronts Aim. Ka Kee3ke-7Rayoo...Ae counsels, reproves. Aim. f Kuskethe/um. ...he is impatient.3 Kuskethetumme-Aa?/oo. . . Ae makes him impatient {htf conduct). Kuakethetumme-mdyoo... he makes him impatient {by speech.) QSege-Aayoo...Ae terrifies Aim, by conduct.'^ Segc-mayoo...id., by words. &c. -nayoo, -num."' Noote-^ 0^00 (anim.).. he fights Aim. Ooteete-na^oo...Ae assaults, attacks Aim. INDICATIVE. ^ vi. 44. 54. Nin gah b&hzegwinde-na'A. . / will raise him by hand (from a seat.) vi. 40. Mm gah bahzegwindenrf^ . . I will raise them up, viii. 55. Ne minjemenon . . / hold, keep, it. xiii. 18. Nin gc oobenahmdg (inv.). . he has lifted t7up^o (against) m«. [xxi. 18. Che ezhewenik (Cree, -nisk). . that he inay away kad thee."] xvi. 13. Ke kah ahne ezhewfsn^goowah (inv.) , . he will away lead you. f 92 A GRAMMAR OF V(ickoochee-nayoo...he eviscerates Aim (as an animal). Ch6ech6eke'nayoo...he scratches him. K&kyf6yth^gge-nayoo...het\cls.]en him. xvi. 2. Ke kah akhge]ew&be-n^goowdg . . they will out-fling you. viii. 36. Ke kah ^khgedenegdom . . they (Fr, on) will free you. i. 42. Oo ge be-eshewenon . . he brought him. xix. 13. Oo ge b^-8&hgejewendffl . . he brought, out-led, him. xiii. 5. Oo ge z^genon . . he poured it. XV. 2. Ood' &hkoo-wabenaAnun . . he flingeth them away. V. 22. Oo ge b&hged6iaAmaAwon . . he has committed it, let it go, to him. ii. 15. Oo ge zegwabenc^AmaAwon (poss. case) . . he poured it away, ix. 34. Oo ge z&hgejewabenaAwon . . they out-flung him. xviii. 28. Oo ge ne 6onje mahjewenaAwon . . they thence removed Am, X.3. Oon esahkoonahmdhgoon(\nv,). . Ae is openec^ to ij/ Aim (the porter), xii. 34. Tah oombenaA . . he will be liited up. viii. 4. Ke dahkoonaA . . he (or she) has been taken. XV. 6. Tah ^koonahwabenaA . . Ae shall be flung away. SUBJUNCTIVE. xii. 32. O'omhe-negdoyon . . if they (Fr. on) lift me up. iv. 11. WdindenaAmMn (flat, vowel) . . that thou takest it. xiii. 12. Kezebegez^dan(^(2 . . that he had wash-footed them. xix. 27. Ke kew&wendd. . he returned, led back, her. iii. 14. Kah ezhe 6ombahkoon(fc2 ..as he had lifted Aim up. xviii. 16. Ke peendegahnc^ii . . he in-handed, led in. Aim. xix. 12. Che bdhgedenefc^ . . that '•e might let Aim go. viii. 28. Ke 6obenaijr . . (that) ye shall have Ufted Aim up. vii. 30. Che t&hkoonaAw(^(2 . . that they might take Aim. viii. 3. Kah bahged^nawt^c^ . . that they had let go her (or Aim), xix. 16. Ke ne mahj^wenaAiorfd . . they led him away. viii. 36. Pdhgedenenrfi^i . . if Ae let go you. viii. 3. Kah dahkoonint^ . . who had been taken. ix. 22. Che z&hgejew^ben/n(2 . . that Ae should be out-flung. viii. 51. Minj^menun^ . . if Ae hold, keep, it. xiii. 12. Kah oodahpenun^ . . that Ae had taken them. X. 4. Kah zahgejewena'Ajin . . when Ae out-handeth ^Aem. XV. 6. Azhe ekoonahwdbenepaArfo'ijf . . as it is flung away. V. 13. Ke mkhj^wene'rfezoo (reflect.) . . Ae had walked himself away. / THE CREB LANGUAGE. 93 10, to ay. him, rter). Vfes(igge-naifoo.,.he hurts him, puts him to pain. M&kwa-»unt...Ae presses it with the hand, squeezes it T4kwa-num...Ae grasps, holds il in the hand. 'Piketi-num...he looses it from the hand, yields, gives, it up. Q(iiske-num...turn-handeth-(it)-he, he turns it with the hand. N6ete-nufn...Ae down-bunds t7, takes it down (from above). Siicku8kin-num...Ae closes it, as a door. S&m^r-:- num ...he touches it with the hand. Ootc-num...Ae from-Aan(/eM, i.e. takes t<. Peeme-num...Ae awry-eth t/. Pimme-nu}ra...Ae twists (^ 0'oipe-num...he lifts it. Sissoon&y-num ...he puts it parallel. Thake-num ...he pushes it. \ W4pe-num...Ae flings it. A^ppithkoo-num...Ae unties it. P6ekoo-n?^OT ...he breaks it. Seekoo-n»m.. he empties it. Seekee-nuin...he pours it. Chee8te-num...Ae pierces it. I Koottippe-num...Ae upsets it, places upside down. ^ Ittissee-num...Ae sends it by hand, hands it thither. &c. -pittiyoo, -pittmn..^^ V^eche-pittdtfoo... he pulls him down. ii6eclie-pittum...he pulls it down. y [xiii. 4. Ke oonje p&hzegwe . . he rose (from a seat).] vi. 39. Che hkhzegviindenahmtk . . that / raise it up (id.). IMPERATIVE. ii. 8. Zege-nahmook . . pour out ye it. xi. 39. E'koonaAmooA- . . with-draw ye it. xix. 15. MahjeweniA . . lead he him away, xxi. 6. A'hp&hgenijf . . let go ye it, drop ye it. '> xi. 44 Tkhkoobezood (accid. pass.) as he was tied. xi. 44. Ke taht^peengwa£e20oA (id.) . . he was tie-face<.e(f< 94 A GRAMMAR OF M6ot'ke-piUdyoo...he bares him by pulling (something away). M6o8ke-pi7/um...Ae exposes, uncovers, it, idem. Kiiske-piUiim...he breaks it by pulling. TaXo-pittum...he tears it by pulling. \ Thkae-pittum.. .he pulls, draws, it down (as a curtain). K6e»ke-pittum...hc tears it off", by pulling. &c. -skawayoo, -shim. A'vfkv/li-skanxiyoo.. he passes behind, avoids, him. Athevf&i-skanxlyoo.. he out walks him. M&ikvfa-»kawdyoo...he meets, i.e. falls in with, him. Tacke-skatvdyoo...he kicks him. ii'&gge-skan)dyoo...he meets him (by land). Kugga-n)dyoo...he meets him (by water). ^^6gg&t-ayoo...he leaves him.'J S(iggekta-tvdyoo...he leaves him by water. &e. -swEiyoo, -sum. M&.t\s-swayoo...ke cuts him. Matis-«um...he cuts it. MAnne-sn)ayoo...he cuts him out. Munne-5um...ke cuts it out. Peekoo-sum...he breaks it by cutting (as a seam). 06the-sum...he cuts it fair or regular. Keeske- jum...^e cuts it off, amputates it. Sktvfk-sum., he cuts it in two. QKasp-ow.. it is brittle.] Kkspe-sum...he makes it brittle, by Jire, crisps it Tk-sum.,.he dries it by the fire. &c. i. 27. DiYikoobeddnig (id. possess, case) . . as they are tied. v. 21. Azhe ooneshkahimod . . as Ae raiseth, pulleth them up (from a recumbent posture, xix. 24. Ke gah k^8hke6e(2dbsenon (neg.). . we (1J2.) will not tear it. THE CRBB LANQUAOB. 95 VAy). Roots are variously susceptible of one or more of these Affixes. v,^, ^ QP^ekoo-pu/Au...t/ breaks.]] Peekoo-Aum...Ae breaks il by force. Fkekoo-tahum...he breaks through it by itriking or ham' mering. PKekoo-skum...he breaks it by accident, or with the foot. P(:ekoo-tum...he breaks, tears it with the mouth, Vkekoo-num...he breaks it with the hand. Peekoo-piltum...he breaks it by pulling. P6e\i0O'Sum...he breaks it by cutting. A'stow-oyoo...!/ is extinct. A8tow6-num...Ae extinguishes it, by hand, e.g. as a candle. ABt6vfe-hum...id., by force, e.g. as a^re, quenches it Ast6we-$A:um...id., by accident, or with the font. The " Special Affixes" make their Reflectives and Reciprocals, respectively, as follows : TRANSITIVE. REFLECTIVE. RECIPROCAL. 3d. P. Sing. 3d. P. Sing. 3d. P. PIu. -■wdyoo -hdossoo -hoottdouk -ta.wdi/00 -tahdossoo 'tahootldouk -skaw<(yoo •skdsoo -akootdtoouk -mdyoo 'Tafssoo -mittdouk -ndyoo -n{ssoo -nittdouk -pittdyoo -■pissoo -Tpittitidouk -swayoo -svrdosoo -svrootldouk om To the " General" and ** Special" we shall add what may be denominated particular affixes, namely, those expressive of the action or operation of the Senses, after the manner of the attribute with which they are respectively compounded. 96 I', 'i * A URAMMAR OF ■IMPLE. 1 ANIM. INAN. Wftppa-wflyoo •turn he sees him or it. ?6y-toivaifOo 'turn he hears him or it. Mbthk-mayoo -turn he smells Aim or it. \ aiaaetdo-spittdtfoo -spUtiim he tastes (perceives a flavour in) Aim or it. he feels him or t7. Mboae-hajfoo -tow COMPOUNDED. Mitho-mtvdyoo -nutn he good- or, well-iee«, admires, him or it. M6tho-toxD(fyoo -turn he YfeW-hears, likes to hear, him or it. ' 'Metho-matdyoo -malum he weW-smells, likes the smell of. Aim or it. (Reflect, -m^soo.) W6eke-pwai/oo -stum he sweet-tastes (likes much the taste of) Aim or it. Methd-skHivdyoo -skum he -weW-Jeeis, likes the feel of, him or t^ N ^ttoo-notvdi/oo. . . he seeks kim.'>* 'SiMet6vfe-notvdyoo...he knows Aim, by sight. h'hyre-n(mdyoo.,.he recognizes him, hy sight. Kittemahke-/toa; (def.)...Ae losc^A i7. ' Wiinne-cA-egayoo (indef.)...Ae lo8Con)...Ae agitates t^ Masse-ch-egrf^oo...Ae agitates. Ne metha-t-cn (anim.-m-ayoo)...7 smell it. Ne metha-ch-egdn.../ smell. Ke wepa-h-en (anim. -Mv-ayoo)...thou sweepest it. Ke •w^Tp&-h-egdn.,.thou sweepest. Mvmne-s-Mm...Ae cuts it. Munne-a-egayoo...he cuts. Kunna-wappa-t-7oo {¥v.on)..,lhey (indet.) someone'xa fight- ing. (Subj. -egdik, or, -egihiewik.) \t-dyoo,.,he so says (to) him, l{.-watfoo,.,he so says (Angl. he says). It-mdnetvoo (Fr. on A\i),,,they (indet.) so say, Angl. peo- ple say ; It is said. (Subj. -walk, or, -w(\newik.) This verb, from its Relative form, is commonly used at the end of the sentence. See Relative Verbs, Sect. IV. oer. \oun ion) Note. — Dr. Edwards, speaking of the Mohegans, one of the Algonquin tribes, observes that " they cannot say, / love, thou givest, ^c. but they can say, I love thee, thou givest him, &c." The examples, of similar grammatical import, which have been adduced in both the animate and inanimate forms, will, I imagine, be sufficient to shew that he is completely in error. Dr. E.'s opinions having, however, been quoted by eminent Philological writers, (sccTooke's Diversions of Purley, Booth's Analytical Dictionary, &c.) they have, generally, an especial claim to notice, and will be hereafter considered in detail. See Additional Notes. he The simple objective forms, also, take the intensive subjective,*" as, Keese-t-ow.../ic finishes it, Keese-t-rlMewoo (Fr. on)... 5. I 106 A GRAMMAR OF Reciprocals and Reflectives take also the same form.*' ii6otenayoo...he fights him. ii6otenUti\fied. xii. 23., xiv. 13. C^he bi'shegaindiihgooi'/K/ . that he should be glori- fed. xii. 38. Kah wahbundalwHt/ . . (//e) irho hath been made to see it. \\. 24., xxi. 2. Aiu'nd . . who is sairf to, or of, calW. v. 33. Ke niibzekahwinrf-ebun . . he has been gone to. xix. Ifi. Che ahgwiihquahrfoMf? . . that he be " crucifiplS"Wf?W , THE CUKK LANGUAGE. 117 S&keliikewjM (indef. time, Sic). ..he is, {may be,) loved, in axaiahle. SAkehikrfo»iMM (infin.)...Ac is \o\ed, qu. by Providence. There is yet another form, which is also passive, and implies obligation or necessity, viz. -at-ikoosu, as, G6o9t-{k-oo-su...he is (eared-generalli/'like, is terr-ible. G6ost-iU-ik-oo-su ..he is lo be t'e&red. \ed, \ed. Paragraph VI. Of the Oblique Cases. It has been observed, that both the direct and the oblique cases of the pronoun are combined with the verb. Tiie nominative and accusative, ex- pressive of the subject and the object, have just been exemplified in their determinate, indeterminate, and indefinite forms. We now proceed to the Oblique cases, or remote object. These cases are as follows, namely — two Datives ; the Vicarious ; the Instrumental ; and the Possessive. Their conjugational forms differ little from those of the Direct cases, the added sign being supplied generally by inserted letters, rather than by change of termina- tion. See Paradigms. These have, like the other cases, their animate and inanimate forms. The first, or common Dative, signifies to or for, and is formed (3 p. sing.) as follows : , Nippa-h-rfy-oo (accus. anim.)...kill-eth-/jj»i-Ac, he kills him. Nippa-t-o'w (id. iiian.)...kill-eth-J<-/jc, he kills it. !^ ' 1, i! 118 A GRAMMAR OF Nipp&-t«ofv-(fy-oo (anim.) ...quasi, \ii\\-eih-him-for'hm-he, he killeth him for him. Si'pipk-t-ittnom-dy-oo (inan.)...kilUeth-t7'^r-/itm-Ae, he kill- eth it for him. See p. 51 e^ seq. ^ Note. — ^The -ay is pronounced as in "may," " say," &c. The oo short. INDICATIVE. •* xvi. 2. NincT ihnook4tai,:}dh . , I work /or him (he will think), xiv. 16. Nin gah iLhnahmeitahwdh . . fwill pray to Mm. xvii. 26. Nin ge vfiendahmdhwog . . I have named, told, it to them. X. 15. Ne h&hgedinahmdhtuog . . J let t^ go, yield it,/or them. xiz. 38. Oo ge mii6odahmahwdn . . he demanded it to (qf) him. V. 22. Oo ge bahged^naAmaAw<$n . . Ae has let t^ go, delivered it, to him. iv. 33. Oo ge h6dahmahwtfn' . . he has brought it for him. ii. 15. Oo ge z6g-w6bendhmahwdn. . he spill - flung, poured away, tr to them. X. 11. Oo migewktahmahwdn . . he jiveth it for him, or them. xii. 22. Oo ge b^-w^endaAma&w(^ . . he has hither-named, told, it to him xii. 22. Oo ge w6endahmahwdhwon. . they have named, told, it to him. viii. 3. Oo ge hidahmahwdhwon . . they have brought him, Sfc.for him. ix. 13. Oo ge hhezheyridahmahwdhwon . . they led, carried, him for him, Sfc. xii. 21. Oo ge '&nd'waw-aindahmahwdhwon . . they expected, desired, to (of) him. xiii. 18. Mn ge 6obenahm6g (inv.) . . he has taken up, raised, to me. X. 3. Oon' esfihkoonaAmetAitoon (id.) ..he is opened/or, by him. xviii. 35. Nin ge bahgedenaAmt^A^oo^ . . . it;e-y6wh (id.) . . they have delivered it to me, thy-hody. XX. 23. £^koon(fAmaAw(^A (id.) . . it is, or, they are, withdrawn to (from) him. XX. 23. Minj^mena'AmaAwe^A (id.). . it is, or, they are, held to him. zix. 4. Ke hidahmdonim (id.) . . / bring Aim to you. xiv. 27. Ke n&hkahdaAnu^onm (id.). . /leave t^ to, or for you. xiv. 29. Ke ke w^endaAmc^onm (id.) . . I have named, told, it to you. xiv. 2. Ke tah ge w^endaAffM^ontm (id.). . / would have told it to you. xiv. 2. Ket' ahwe wahw^zhe^aAwrfontm (id.). . /go prepare it for you. THE CREE LANGUAGE. 119 Zeisberoer has stated, and I believe correctly, that, in the L^nni Lendpe, a kindred dialect, there is a verbal dative case, but his Indian examples are, with one exception, in the accusative. xvi. 7- Ke kah ^ihgedinahmdonim (inv.)- ■ / will deliver him to you. SUBJUNCTIVE. [viii. 59. Ke gihzoo (reflect.). . he hid himself.'] xii. 36. Ke kihzoo-tahwdd (id.). . he hid himself-to-(from)-them. xviii. 14. Che n^hootahwdd . . that he die /or him, or them. XV. 13. Che fihged4nahmahw(fd . . that he let go, yield, it for him, or them. xix. 16. Ke hkhgedenahmahwiSd . . he let go, dehvered, him to him or them. iii. 33. Kah ootihpendhmahwiid (Ae) who hath taken, received, to (from) him it (his relation), xii. 2. Ke 6ozhetdhmahwdhwod . . (and) th^y made it for him. xvii. 15. Che medihgwaxiahmdhw-ahdwdh. . (-udwah) that^Aou take it for them. xix. 11. Kah b^hged^noAmrfo-fc (sk, Cree) ewh nc.ydwh. . he who let t^ go, i.e. delivered it, to thee, my-body. i. 23. Qtaiyukqaatdhmk (imperat.) . . strait-make ye it for him. xiv. 3. Ahwe wahw&zhetahmdonaAycfoit (inv.) . . (if) / go prepare it for you. xviii. 39- Che b&hged^naAmoonaAyOo^ (id.). . that /deliver Aim to you. iii. 12. Ke w^endahm6o(ne)naAyd^oX; (id.). . (if) I have named t^ or them, to you. xvi. 23. Ka \ind6odahmdhwdgwdig . . (whatsoever) ye shall demand to (of) him. XX. 23. (W&gwdin) (^koonaAnu^Awaywc^tn (dub. flat vowel.) . . (whom- soever) ye withdraw to (from) Aim. XX. 23. (W&gw&in) xa.divi]Cva.vciahmdh'wdg'mdi» (id.) . . (whomsoever) ye hold if to him. XV. 16. (W%6odoogwain) ka undoocfaAmaAwaAwoywe^in (dub.) . . . (whatsoever) ye shall demand, ask, to ifff) him. NEGATIVE INDICATIVE. [xvii. 9. Nind' ahnahmeafaAwoV . . / pray /or them."] xvii. 9. 20. Nind' 6hnahmektahwdhseeg . . J pray not for them. ii. 24. Oo ge b4hgedenaAmaAw(fy(io...fling-cth-a/-Aim-/iC, he flings at him. Wdpe-n-(J/-Mm...fling-cth-«/-i7-/endhmahwdhs^en . . he taketh it to (from) him not. xix. 33. Oo ge h6okoo-g&hd&ga\\nahm({/isewo-d (n indie.) . . they have break-Icg-/o-Aim net. V. 34. Nind* 6ondc-n-ahm-dh goose (inv.). . me-t&kcs-for-he-not. xviii. 30. Ke dah g6 pihgei^nahmahgdose (id.). . they (iudeter.) would not have delivered him to thee, xn. 23. Ke kah nnidodahmdhweseem (dir.) . . ye shall not ask it to (qf) tne. iii. 11. Kef ootkhpenahmdhwesemin (id.). . ye take it to (receive /rom) us (1.3.) not. [xii. 42. Ooge oonje yrindhsewon (accus.anira.). . they have therefore named him not.Ji xvi. 4. Ke ke w4en-dahm6osendonim (inv. inan.) . . / have not named (told) it to you. viii. 50, ISiin undahw&indahmdhdezoose (reflect.) . . / seek to or for myself not. iv. 21. Che t^hzhe Ahnahmea-^wAirrfA^fHW^' Tsubj.) .. that constant pray.^o him-not-ye. he )nt TIIK (REE LANGUAGE. 121 The Instrumental cas*; is formed from the inanimate form of tiie indefinite objective, by changing the third person -gdyoo, into -gd-gdyoo, and implies with, or of, an instrument or material, as, Si\)\}ii-d\-eg(iyoo...ke kills. liilil)h-d\-eg(i-g<1s\oo (nmn\.)...he makes him for himxeff. 0'oHe-t-ilm-()ssoo (inan.).. he makes it for himself. O'oBe-t'tviil-tooHk (anim.)... they make them for each other. O'ose-t-itm-dttoouk (inan.)... they make them for each other. ^^ The Intensive forms of the Oblique are formed as those of the Direct cases — namely, by the terminations -wdyoo and -^ayoo. O'oae-t-itw-ayoo (anim,),.. he tn&Vea hi7n for him. O'oae-t-iim-dw-dyoo (inan.) ..he makes it for him. O'ose-t-Wfl-gayoo (anim.)...Ae makes ^r (others). O'oae-t-dm-dgdyoo (inan.) ... he makes for (others, some one)."^ BA RECIPROCAL. V. 44. Ooyoodihpenahmdkdeydig (subj.) ..ye who take to CfromJ one another. «6 [ii. 14. Mahy&shquahdoontinjrijr (subj. inan. flat. vow. def.) . . . who exchange theni]. ii. 15. Mahyashquahdoona^waAjfo/ii^ (id.) ..ivho exchange (indef.), for others. 122 A ORAMMAR OF Again — To the Indefinite form of tlie Objective case may be super-added a definite Oblique case, as above, e.g. ' 0'o»e-t-on> (dof. obj.)...Ae makes it. 0'ofic-c\\-cg(fif'Oo (iiulef. obj.),..he makes. O'o»c-c\\-eg(iy-i-dtn-^^oo.../ie sings to him, or tliem. A'chemoo ..he relates. \'chemito-stotvdyoo...he relates to him. Khaoo (reflect. )...Ae hides himself. KA9oo-slowtiyoo...he hides himself to (from) him. Ne n\ggfan6o-slotv(ltv...l sing to him, Ne mgga.moo-^t(ik...he sings to me. ftet " Substantive-verbs" form their cases in the same manner ; as from Assdm, a snow-shoe, Assdm-e-k-(fyoo (see p. 19)'>-sno\ir.shoe-makes-Ae. Ass&m-e-k-ow-rfyoo (def.)...Ae, &c. for him, e.g. a pair for his use. As8&m-e-k»ly-/amo»v-rf^oo (indef.) ...he, &c. generally, ybr him. Net' assiiin-e-kowrfw (def. dir.) ../, SiC.for him. TIIR CRRIC I.ANODAGR. 123 ase ve, /or 8es of one le or or Net' asaCtin*e-k(}it (id. inv.)...A«, 8ic.for me. Nci' anhm-e-V.iik-6mn...thry (indet.) make, e.g. a pair, &c. for me. Ncl' atH&iu-e-Vay -tam-iik-drvin ...me 8now>ihoe-niakc-(geNC- ralli/)-/br-he + they (Fr. on). ttC The Possessive or Accessory case, being very puzzling, at least, to learners, must be given at some length ; we have therefore assigned to it the last place in the list of verbal oblique cases. Unlike the other cases, this refers to third persons exclusively, as the " end," &c. Though thus limited in its appli- cation, it is nevertheless of very extensive use. It may be superadded to all the other cases. The simple form of this verbal ending, viz. Indie. -ethu, anim. and inan., (Chip, -wwn anim,, -en^h inan.) Subj. -ethit (anim.), -ethik (inan.) ; Chip, -enid (anim.), -enig (inan.), signifies to him, that is, with respect to, or, in relation to him, her or them ; but, in English, the equivalent of this sign is often omitted, and vaguely only, if at all, understood. There does not appear to be, in English, any equivalent term for this oblique case, at least one which is uniformly used. Its import is variously expressed by the prepositions to,Jor, with, &c. as, it is lost to him, that is, as regards him — a child is born to him — it is difficult for him — it goes hard with him, &c. which may be all resolved into in relation to him ; but, as just remarked, this sign so frequently occurring in the Indian, is comparatively seldom found in the English phrase, and seldom is, grammatically, even under- stood. With the appropriation to the " third" person before men- tioned, it is conjugated through the different forms of the verb. Some notion of the manner of using this case may be conceived from the following example. 124 A (iU. VMM. Alt 0|- W I wish to sny Hiinply " It raiiiM," tlir Crco verb is cxprossod tluis, Kiiiiinow-/(n {-ilk, suhj.) — and {\\\a we shall, in ourexaini)li's, call the absolute lorni ; but, if 1 mention this eircMunstance with reference to a ** third" person or persons, I then use the termination above mentioned, -othu, as, Kinimewun-f//j»t . . " It rains to him, in relation to him,'' &c. — this we shall call the rrlative form. Tlu> " coiiHUnt" ni^n «»t' this cnsr is th (Chip. «.). foriiiH, w or m, in both (lialcctH. Ill some Mi^pooN (iiulic.) ,.it snows. M isp()on*W/«( (id.)... it Hnows-Zo him, as rcHpectfl liini. Set' appi/i ho MiapooX- (siibj-).../ .stay, as it snows. Kct' iippi'i ho Mi8p6oAr...// u»a» hollowed, ex- cavated. li V2H A GRAMMAR OT hf, him, himself, she, her, &.v ; th« third pcmon, IVrtha (Chip. II Wm), boing, when oxprcsMotl, tho representative of them nil. S\Up. — KoKDK notircH n corroHixiiuling tnnilitlcntion of tho verb, in hin Grammatica Griinlandira. Seo Additional Notes. vii. 3S. Tail oonJi'jcwun-f'^MrH'Mtt (plur.). . they hIiiiII from-flow. HUIIJIINCTIVIO. vi. li. A't-dkin (flat vowels . which are laid uj), which remain. XX. 5. Ko fihy-Wxi-Hniff {intens.), , us they wore lying. i. 4(). ii. 10. \V(»noHh('Nhin-.7 (innn.) . . h'/mVA w good, ii. 10. Wanivslu'slu^ii-pii^y . . which is good. i. '17. DMikool)e(ll)8erved. Infinitive mood. These are all resolved into a personal (th»' tmLfunatimt) mood, as above. Vide infra. But not all relations between the Verb and its Re- gimen are expressible by Cases. Prepositions are sometimes employed, being prefixed to the verb, and governing the verbal termination in the Accusative or Dative forms already mentioned. Neuter verbs fol- lowed, in English, by a preposition and a personal pronoun, become, by the process alluded to. Transi- tive verbs, e.g. A'p-K (neut.).../ic sits. Ne w«!et-iipC-mrfiu(dir.accu8.).../ with-sit-/n'm, I sit with him. Nc yikei-ii\i¥:-m{k (inv. id.)...mc with-sits-Ae, he co-sits, sits with, me. (See p. CA, el seq.) Ne wiiiVoXi'kTpi^-slAktvuk (inv. dat.)...wc round-sit-( -skum -wdyoo -li«/« »iC. I'ssc-nowr/yoo™ -uilm -towf/yot*'"' -tiim -tiirit«_yoo -tnatiim Ite-ndyoo -pittfi^oo -num -pitttim •"' V. 19. \y^zhe-na\\w4d (iinim. flat vowel)«s he Haw him. vii. 24. /I'^Ac-nahmrfiy (inan. id.) . . as ye see it. viii. 38. K\h ^she-nahwdiff raniin.). . which 03 ye see him, '0 viii. 26. 40. xv. l.'i. Kah (-ne-tahwug . . which as I hear him. V. 30. A^ne-tahmdn (flat vow.). . as I hear »7. The reader will, by noticing thtj " conversions" of the lingual conso- nnnfs here exemplifled, viz. dzhe =- dne, hhe = ^c (see p. 17), be some- what prepared for our future observations on this head. See also, iii. 4. 9. V. 44. 47. vi. 52. Ahn' eoN (i.e. ahn' ezH)?. . what " man- ner," " how ?" Note. — ^The Chippeway zh has the sound of s in " measure," " plea- sure." 134 A GRAMMAR OF These generic attributes are especially used (in the subjunctive) in Qftestions of "manner," " place," &c. Tdn' isse ?...Wliat manner? Hotv f Tdn' a-e f ..what place ? Where ? Whither ? T&n' ISSE ^issE-pitt^/ f (generic)... what manner so-puUeth 'he'him ? Ne'ch E-pitt^^oo (specific) . . . DOWN-puUeth-A«-Ai»«. TAn' isse I'ssE-matf)^ ? (gener.)...how so-smelleth-Ae-t7 ? Ms'TMo-nidtum (specif.). ../lewELL-smells it, likes the smell of it. TAn' iT-E i'T-oc*ait? (gener.)...what place To-goeth«Ae? Rlcegewflp-cc* I'r-uotayoo (specif.)..the Tent-fl< To-goeth-Ae. ( t Chapter II. Of Simple and Compound Verbs. Of the Simple Verb. — In noticing the Simple Verb, as respects its component parts, we have pointed out (p. 16 ef seq.) the various Origin of the Root. This will be a fit opportunity to complete the description of this member of the verb ; which shall now be considered in its other character, namely, that of At- tribute, or with a reference to its Signification ; and we propose to contemplate it as resting (simple, or modi- fied,) on/oMr principal points, namely, 1, Existence ; 2, Relation ; 3, Privation ; and 4, IrTENSiTY : — which last comprises the other three. To these fimdamental Principles (which will in due course be defined) may, indeed, be proximately or remotely referred the whole Cree language, as we shall endeavour to shew in the sequel ; but our immediate concern is with the Attribute of the Verb. THE CR£B LANGUAGE. 135 ' " Section I. Firstly, of Existence. Tliis subject presents itself under a two-fold aspect, viz. Existence, and Privation of Existence — or Being in its Positive and Negative modes. These opposite modes are indeed expressed, substantially, by modifications of the same Element (vide infra Privation) ; but, furnishing two classes of terms differing widely from each other in signification, they will, for the sake of clearness, be noticed, gene- rally, apart. With reference then to Existence, in its positive mode, we proceed now to bring into view the Simple Verbs expressive of the primary generic "Attributes" following, namely, those of I, Being ; 2, Manner; 3, Rest ; 4, Motion ; 5, Action. These Verbs, although few in number, are of very extensive use ; and, as entering into and constituting, under different modifi- cations, integral parts of other verbs, they may be considered as Elementary. Some of them will be noticed in both their positive and privative (see Priva- tion) significations. And first of the Verb- Substantive. We would remark, by way of preliminary to what follows, that there are, in the Cree language,ybar primary generic nouns, namely, 1. I'-d (anhn.), /'-e (inan.), " person," " thing," &c. j 2. Fss-e or I's-e, " manner," " wise," &c. ; 3. I't-e, " place ;" and 4. E'k-e, " matter," " subject." Of which it may be further remarked, that their roots, represented by /-, /*-, It-, Ek- (pron. Eek-), respectively, are modifications (vide infra) of the stiU higher — the UNIVERSAL Substantive Element, or Root> Eth — the remote point f»' ^fi^ — the substratum (however obscured by its modes) on which the "~" '' whole Edifice of the Cree — the Algonquin language rests. This ultimate Element has, in its siniple form, a Substantive 130 A GRAMMAR OF meaning — but it cannot stand alone ; — like the indefinite Subject of which it is the representative, it is ever in a modi/kd form, c.g> as we have it in the personal pronouns, I, thou, he, A^-e'tii-S, X-e'tii-A, fT-t'Tii-fi, qu. my, thy, his, Being or Essence ; the lingual, n, the guttural, k, and the labial, oo, being the distinctive personal signs of the same. (Quasi, Anglic^, tru-Tii, wid-TH, mon-Tii = moon-ETii, &c.). It is "energetic" in the verb tfTn-ETHS'-oo (repetit see p. 73)...iin-EATMe8-/jc, &c. PAnAORAPIt I. Being, I-6io {=d+oo) " he is." We have, in the last Chapter, classed verbs as Absolute, and Rela- tive. The Verb Substantive, in its Absolute form, h6w,C\\ip.Bhy-dh, (anim.and many* he, or it, is being, or existent," Anglic(&, *' he, or it, is" — may, like the noun first above mentioned, viz. la, be viewed as a Derivative (See p. 141.) from the ultimate Element Eth. We consider it as being the Nucleus of the whole Indian verb. It forms its three persons (sing.) as follows, INDICATIVE. CRBE. cniPPEfVAY. Anim. -&n -&n -6w -dh .&h -ah Inan. -6w •&h id. (contin.) -&raagun -iimagud SUBJUNCTIVE. Anim. -Ian -lun -iit -dhyon -ahyun -6d Inan. -ak -6g id. (contin.) -iimagak -dmagiik " ''I INDICATIVE. vi. 9. viii. 35. 50. Ahy-a7{ ,.he is being or existent, Augl. he is. i. 1.6. iv. 40. vii. g. Ke ahy-aA . . he has been, xii. 26. Tah ahy-dh . . he shall or will be. ii. 1. XX. 26. xxi. 25. xii. 48. xiv. 2. Ke abyah-w«n (possess, case). lie or they was or were. THE CRRB LANOUAGK. 137 Note.— It would seem ntrarge that the vvriterH on the Algonquin lan- guage, viz. Ki.ioT, EowAROH, &c. all deny the existence of the Verb Substantive in the dialects on which they have Hovcrally written. This mistake has clearly arisen — partly from the idiomatio omission of the verb substantive in n certain kind of Expressions (see Syntax); — and partly from an entire misconception of the Subject, as is evidenced l>y the tenor of their Examples, which go to prove only that these dialects have no AuxiMAKY Verb Substantive. See Additional Notes. lt-6w (=rf + oo) "he is there." Fr. il y est. The Re- lative form of tlie Verb Substantive has for its Attribute vi. 64. Ket a\iy-6m . . ye ure. V. 13. xvii. 11. xii. 20. xxi. 2. Kc ahyuh-wug .. they were V. 2. xii. 24. 28. 30. Ahy&h-maA^u'/ (inan. indie.) . . it is. XV. 7- XV. 11. 16. WiykYi'mtthgtik (id. subj.) . .i( it be, that it be, re- main. RUOJUNCTIVR. i. 15. 30. vii. 34. 3G. ix. 5. xii. 26. 32. xv. 5. X'hydli-yifn . . that, &c. /am. i. 48. Ke ahydh-yun . . (when) thou wast. i. 51. vii. 11. 29. viii. 19- ix. 12. x. 40. Ahj-dd. (that, &c.) he is. i. 18. 33. iii. 22. xii. 37. \hydhnid (acces. case.). . that, &c. he is (with relation to another), viii. 31. xiv. 2. 3. A'hydhydiy . . if, &c. ye be. i. 29. vi. 51. vii. 4. hfydhjig . . who (they) arc. iii. 8. iv. 22. iv. 40. xii. 20. xxi. 23. A?.he-ahy(^A-wocf. . as, so, are they. XV. 4. A'hydhyooJfc (imperat.) . . be ye . . .' i. 15. Chcpwah. . . . khydhydn (subj. pres.), ahyrfA-bun (indie, pret.) . . Before . . . . / am, fie was. " He was before me." INANIMATE. iv. 5. ix. 41. xi. 55. xii. 1. xiii. 1. xvii. 5. A'hyrf*/ . . (which) it is. ii. 25. iii. 36. Ahydhnig (access, case) . . which {it) was. iv. 6. xix. 42. Emah ke ahydhnig . . (possess, case) . . his. . (or their) was there, iii. 36. Ka ahydh-nig (possess, case) . . hii. . shall be. NEGATIVE. viii. 35. Ahydh-se (indie). . he is not, abideth not. vi. 24. XV. 6. Ahyiih-sig (subj. anim.) . . that he was not, if he be not. vi. 22. viii. 37. xv. 4. Ke ahyah-senooa (subj. inan.) .. that i7 was no/. 138 A GRAMMAR OF the relative prefix of "place," It- (sec p. 132), as lt-6uf (anini.), I't-akwun (inan.), " he or it is there ;" and is often used, as iu the English collo(iuial phrase- ology, to signify indifferently " being at," " staying at," " residing at." Strictly, it imports only (in the animate form) a temporary abiding at, &c. Anira. luan. .&n Anim. Inan. -Ian •C'ltKE. -I'ln -Iiin INDICATIVE. -6w -lih -uk Willi SUUJUNCTIVK. -lit -akwuk cniPPEtrAY. -4Ii .lih -ahgdo -iihyun -ahyun 6a ■ahg«'>og'* This form is also used without a particular reference to '* place." Its animate and inanimate forms are then equivalent, respectively, to the English Indejinite Verb Substantive form, " There is" ap€rso7i or thing. (Fr. il y a) The Chippewny corresponding terms are (Jones's Ortliofj.) Indie. Eend-dh (or A-dh), and F/end-ahgdo (or d-d/igdo). Siibj. E'end-o(/,and, E'end-ahgoo-g (or d-o'rf, and d-ahgoo-g).'* Note. — ^This Relative verb is further deserving of notice, as exem- plifying the manner in which the generic Attribute of Beino, /-, or Ei; is commuted for (or according to our own views, vide infra, modified '* ANIMATE. i. 38. Ahn' eende iinidhyun (subj. flat vow.). . where art thou at, dwellest-fAou. i. 39. xviii. 2S. xix. 27. Em&h iinidd (id.). . where he was abiding, xvi. 32. Emah kinddhyaig (id.). . where ye abide, dwell, vii. 53. Aymdakwdd (id.) . . where they dwell. INANIMATE. xviii. 1. Emah ke tkhgdo (indie.) . . there (it) was. vi. 27. Ka tahgdog emah (subj.) . which {it) shall be there, ii. 1. ii. 11. iv. 46. A'indahgtfo*/ (subj. flat vow.). . which (it) is (in Gahlee). THE CRBB LANGUAGE. 139 in/o) Bip«ci/lo Attribute — where, of the primitive verb, the accented d(.+oo ■ign of 3d purH.), or diitinctive predicntive eign, (retained through all the iuflectioni) iit alone preiierved. This mode of the verb aubitantive, affecting a very numcrouH clasH of verbal terms (vide infra), exhibits a partial view of our reasons for considering the verb substantive to be the Nucleut of the Indian verb. .79 The Possessive verb we shall consider as two-fold, viz. to '• have," and to '* own." T' e fom.er of thi^se, implying a temporary possession, is also expressed by a modification of the Verb Substantive. It is Ti ansitive both in form and signification, as, I'-ow^^yoo (anim.).. he has Aim. (Chip. Ood' khy-ahy, {n.) l'-Ku8ketay ..it is day. Tibbiskon;...27 tonight. :WcipM«...j7 is dawn, day-light. 'Neptn...27 is summer. •PepooM...i7 is winter. Tuckwftkin,..i< is autumn. Si'kw?/H...i7 is spring. L .:&t^ .) 146 A GRAMMAR OF WEATHER. Kimmewun.. itraim. < Mispoon...!/ snow«. I Pev/un...it drifts. I Says&y kun ...it haib. 1. Kisshin(^n;...i< t« cold. \ K#es-appwow...t< is hot (weather). ' rKis-&stayoo...t7 is hot (in the sunshine). \ PLACE. ; Wutchewoo. . it is hilly. -J Pdssachon'.. it is low ground, a vale. T6w-uttinon>.. i7 i* 'twixt-hill, a valley. &c. Note.— 'AW the Adjective Verbs, mentioned above, have the two verbal endings, viz. the Animate and the Inanimate. See p. 131. Occasional or Accidental (Neuter) Verbs. See pp. 25, et seq. 32. Is-ptith-?!. fChip. -peda, inan.^.-.so-moveth it (see p- 80). S6ke-puthu...tV spills. Taske-puthu...t7 splits. Thathicke-puthu...!*/ rends, as cloth. Tato-piithu...t7 tears. Ta-tato-piith« (iterat.)...»V tears to pieces, to " tatters." Kuskutche-puthK...tV breaks (as a stick). N^tw&-puthu...27 breaks in two. Puske-puthu...tV snaps (in two), as a line or cord. Chech^eske-piithu.. it creaks. Pasta-puth?<...i7 breaks (as a nut). Paske-puthu.. it bursts (from without) as a bladder. PP6ekoo-p •<>» (inan.) I, 8fc. put it. h'che-gajfoo (indef. obi.)...Aeputs, places. (See p. 101.) A'che-g&sww (particip. pass, anim.) ...he is put- placed. 'g^i-kyoo (id. inan.)...t7 id. (See p. Ill et seq.) CHIPPEWAY. {Nind, 4*0.) ^8-4h, -ah, -4un (anim.) ... (/, Sfc.) put Mm I (pron. ^-s&h, &c.). {Nind, ^c.) ^t-6on, -don -6on (inan.)...(/, SfC.) put it (pron. 4t-t6on, &c.). Note.— The root (aTH) of this verb, irregular in both dialects, exhibits in its modifications, as above, some of the " conversions" of the (lingual) element M. The above signs ah, ath, ast (Chip. &t), are privative or opposite also in the following and other similar expressions. 2Vb/e.— The "f* TRANSITIVE ANIMATE. xi. 34. Ke iiiidig (subj.) . . ye have laid him. xix. 42. AAaahvodd (id.) . . that they laid him. u. 15. Ke 9!ta(Uiwikd4m (id. dubit.) . . (the place) thou hast put, « laid," him. XX. 2. 13. Ke tSasdhwahg-ytim (id. dubit.) (id.) they have put, "laid," Aim. INANIMATE. ix. IS. Oo ge aht(fon (indie.). . he did put it. xiii. 4. Oo ge ahtdbnun (id. plur.) . . he put, placed, " laid aside," them. xiii. 2. Ke shi6od (subj.) . . he had put it. xix. 2. 29. Ke 6!lxUi(m6d (id.) . they put it. xix. 29. Ke iiizh&.gahdd (particip. pass, see p, 111), , it had been set. put, put, tide," In set. THE CREE LANGUAGE. 151 Chippeways often omit the Cree s, lengthening the preceding vowel. (Quasi, Angl. master, atrange ; Pr. maitre, strange, &c.y* A'b-ootuyoo...Ae back-goes. I-(^be-piithu {I = M intens. see p. 71) •■• he backward and forward moves. Ab-i8-w«u (anim.) ...he is back-like, i.e. is recovering, or recovered, e.g. from a fit. A'b-ow (inan.)...t< is back, i.e. oP-en. A'ba-hum...Ae op-ens it. A'b-ootdntim... back-takes he-it, turns it inside out. A'st-owdyoo...t7 is back, extinct (fire), Angl. " out." A'sta(y)-p&y-oo...back-drink-M-Ap. he is (become) sober. A'sta(y)-kwamu...Ae back-sleep is, is recovered from sleep. A'thoo-&sti-n...t7 pause-blow is, it is (become) calm, still. Athoo-^pw, pron. fith-wepu (intens.)... Ae re-sits, rests, re- poses. Atoo-6thetum...Ae back-thinks, dislikes, it.'''' QMetho-ethetum...Ae well-thinks, likes, approves, it."] Anwe-tum (see p. 9G)...he back-hears, dis-believes, t7. Astuo-gumtn«...t7 is back-, still- water, moderated current. A'8tum-oowuyoo...Ae back- (inan.).../i(r hangs it up. A'koo-chegt\8-oo (part, pass- Rnim.)...he is hangi'c^ up (liy an agent). A'koo-chcgut-ayoo (id. inan.)... t< is hanged up (id.). A'koo-8u.../ie sits (a bird in a tree). A'\{.oo-moo...he suspends, sits (a duck in the water). A'koo-tin...i7 hangs, suspends, is «i/-uate, e.g. an island, in the water. The following expressions also, among others, exhibit this attributive sign as being likewise sometimes positive, sometimes privative ; in whichsoever sense it appears, whether as the primary or the accessory attribute, the signification may be considered as " intensive" also. See Intensity. A'goo-thowiiy 00... t7 very hard-blows, blows a hurricane. Awkoo-tho-w&y-sM...hurricane-ish-(is)-Ac, kc is stormy, i.e. he is passionate. '"'vi. 21. Ke ^hgwahsd-mahgud. . it was suspended, " anchored." xix. 31. Che &hgooda-senoo^ (accid. pass. neg. subj.) . . that they he not, " remain", hung up. '•^ xi. iii. A'hkoo-^f . . he if sick. ♦ Sec Privation. (I.y III s THE (MIKK I.ANOUAOK. 158 A'g(HVA8tHy(w...i/ i> (|uitc-opp(M(itc-(Bun)light, i.v. Hhade. AytWH-hKn..,!/ qiiite-oppoBite-, hack-wavc-u, the wavcH nre (|uite ••Hll. A'g('to-c-»kowAyoo...Ather-i8-/ic-(at), he is else- where. A't-ap-7< (anini.) []Aund'-i'ihbf//].../tc o//jtT-sits, changes his seat. A't-astiiyoo (inan.) QAund'-aht^]...// is, or is lyin^jf, in another place. A't-ath(/yoo (anim.) \^Ood' aund'-ass;'iu?i]...Ac rt/i-ates, puts, /»'?« in :m-othcr place, Anfjl. removes hiui. A't-ast(//w (inan.) []Ood' aund'-alUi >()«].../»■ removes it. A't-ootayoo [[aund'-oot(r]...//e jj;oe.s t7.vcwhere, " removes." A't-cthow-ka-yoo.. othcr-being-niaketh-//f, he relates fables. ''* vi. 20. Neen (sah) ween. . / (sah affirm. j)art.) he, or it, Anptlice, it is /. i.\. (). Me ... . wowh . . why this ! Anglice, why this (is) he ! i. 21. Elijah (nah) Aee/i .^. . Elias {nah, interrog.) t/iou i^ Art thou EHas ? xxi. 24. Me .... wowh minzhenahwa, Ital. Ecco . . . this (is) thb disciple. X. 7- Neen (sah) ewh ond' cshqu6ndam(?toaA . . / (sah affirm, jiarl.) THAT their door, " / am the door of (thcni). ..." .X 0. AV('H(sah) Kwii ishquoiidiiim. . /, riiAr door, "1 amTiiK door." * Quasi Anpl " «oj>," " Aod-lc" TIIK CURE LANOUAUK. ir>7 or .1 IfS. IIR ■(.) I A't-!Vw<;o«.../\' in oilier he,or person (than lie was, pliysicuily). A'l-iik [^A\\-\\ug']... other Hein;;f, viz. n star. Avh-i\k Q()'ojp-cht')g]...o//*cr Being, viz. the 8oul or spirit. E-rtV/i-Ethinii (E intens.)...(a) \cry-other Indian (homo) a foreigner. E-iU-oogum-iA w6eg« (id.) ••• very-other (distant) liubitatiun- in he dwells. A't-ee (adv.) (Chip, aline, ne)...on, f'roinward, away.**^' A*t-it (conj. ndvcrs.). ..yF.T, although, &c. (y.'iJ. A't-e-sJdun']...hc dyes i(. A't-aw6.j/(x> Q'lhd-aliwrf]. ./ Pissekw-at-issM rp^shegw-ahd-ez*^] ... he is wicked, loose (id.).88 Kiss^w-at-issu . . he is kind. Kis-tit-issu...Ac sticks-like, is fond. 2. AcH- (=a(i)ch). This mode of the particle, at, retains the signification of its Primitive, whether ns an accessory or primary attribute. A'chc or ache..." else," other, alias. A'ch-ttii (= al-ibi, Lat.)...c/.?c- where, other place. A'che-gapow-oo.../jc stands aloof; quasi, di-stant-(is)-//e. A'che-wi;eg»/...Ac tents elsewhere. A'che-p6ostesk«»n.. he o*' xvii. 25. O wayooseraind quiyuk ^zhcwabezeyure (flat, vowel). . O he who is fatheret/ (see Note Gl p. 109) straight (i.e. uprightly) who (quasi) behaves/. " O righteous father." "'* viii.3.4. Miigwah poshegwahdczii/. . whilst he (sIk) was loose, wicked. I THE CREE LANGUAGE. 159 his t. .V. he lly) As a primary attribute or root : CREE. (.Nel't (!{-c.) Ach>en> -<^n, Ach- CHIPPEWAY. (Nind, ^c.) Aunj, aunj, Aunj- -coo. -emagun. aunj-eh. -dmahgut. AclZ-ean, SUDJUNCTIVE. CREE. CIIIPPEIVAY. -dun -et. Aunj'-eyon, -dyun, -et. Ach-eoo (contin.) [|Chip. Aunj'eh]...Ae moves, is moving. A'che-piitli« (tempor.) [Aunj'e-b6zoo]...Ac ali-movea, i.e. re-moves (suddenly), alters. (See pp. 32. 80. 146.) Ach6-magun [^aunj'6-mahgut] (contin. )...i< moves. A'che-h-oyoo \^0od' aunj''o-(h)-o«, or, -aun (trans, anim.)... he alters (aCDters), changes, Aim.*® A'che-t-ow [^Ood' aunj'e-t-oon] (id. inan.)...Ae, &c. it. I-ichc-trfw (id. inan. inter s.)...Ae r«-does, re-makes, it. A'che-che-g&yoo (^aunj6-ch-eff" mag»» ; in its I'rivatively, it .what iiuantili/ t.)willi7(def.) ( ? i.e. what is te Eki-n (Indie.) . t^ is summer ; ir transitive -t-an, -t-an, ndef.). (p. pa83, " bring ibout, brought behig some- ;^erbs Etu and srgetic t, and s) forms, viz. |»er hand, the le Accidental \t)ch,j,s,z,&c. :" elements in fr cognate n in ictive affix -en, vhat manner •• "What do THE CREE L.\N(;UAaE. 165 e.g. black-EN. As respects iiosition, also, it may almost be said to connect in like manner the attribute with the object, as, Ne kinwoo-T-an, quasi, f length' ^:N-t^ In the Accidental and Participial passives the same element (t or d) is also analoi(ous to the English participial signs d, t, and (their cognate) a. Cree -aT-, Chip, -an- ; Ital. -ar-, Span, -au-, pp. 111. H2. (Vide infra.) Pai. '■ WW VI. Force, Causation, ^ Thus far, then, of the primary generic modes of tjxistence, and the " Simple" verbal terms by which they are represented in this language. The " Attribute" of the verb being, how- ever (p. 97), a subject of Degree, it must be further observed respecting certain intensive modes of Energy or action that the same are, in Cree, represented in a two-fold manner — by Words, and also by Signs. First, by Words, as the verbal terms corresponding with the English verbs, (to do, see last Par.) to force, to tnake, cause, &c. The attributive roots of these verbs have, in Cree, a composite form, — have two or more " constant" elements (s-k-oo, k-sk, oo-s), and are transitive, as follows, QSaKoo-h-a^oo.../«e conqu-ers-/«'ffi ; subdues, overcomes, him SiiKoo-t-OTV...he overcomes it, e.g. a heavy weight.] ShKoo'-cke-h-ayoo ... conquer-/JAc-/je-/iim« he forces, com- pels, him.^* SdKoo'-che-m-ai/oo (Special, by Speech, p. 87)... he "forces," prevails on, convinces, him. KuSK'e-t-ow.../jc CAUSES, " effects," e7.9* 9*xvi.33. Nin ge shahgoo-je-r^/. . I have conquered-like-, "overcome " them. 9' xvii, 2. Che kahshke-od (subj. anim.) . . that he have " power" over them. ■•. 27. Che kahshke-t-o'orf (id. inan.) that hr " execute" if. .«< €# IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I If 1^ 11^ u Ki III 2.2 S lit ■■■ ill 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 -< 6" — ► V] f7 %. ♦^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80 (716) 872-4503 \ i^ 6^ 166 A GRAMMAR OF Oose-h-ayoo ... from-do-(eth)-Ae-/»'m, i. e. he produces, " makes," him.w Oose-t-ow ...he " makes" it. This last verb is the transitive of Ooche-oo . . . from-eth-Ae. Ooche-magMn...from-eth-i7, it proceeds. Secondly, by Signs, as the active or " energetic" t or d (lingual), tv (labial), k or g (guttural), the aspirate h, the diphthongal / {M), and the conjoint sk, all of which have been already described as severally expressing, in certain positions, intensive meanings of the Action, similar to those of the English verbs above mentioned, (pp. 37etseq. 18. 19- 86.) vi. 52. ix. 16. K& ezhe k^shket6o-pun (id.). . (how) shall so achieve, eSect-it-he f &c. ■' NEGATIVE. xi. 37. Oo tah ge kahshkedhseen} (anim.). . he could have " caused" him not ..? , V. 30. Nin tah g4hshket6os/en (inan.). . (nothing) ^ can eflFeci, it not. V. 1 9- ix. 33. Oo tah gahshketoos^en (id.) . . he can (or could) effect t^ not. iii. 2. Kah .... ahweyah oo tah gahshketoosen-un (id. plur.). . not any-one he can effect-no^-Mero. vii. 34. Ke kah kahshketoos^oAwaA (innn.) ye will not effect it. XV. 5. Ke tah kahshketoos^aAwa'A (id.) . ye can not effect it. viii. 21. 22. Ke kah gah8hke6os^e»i (reflect.) . . ye will not prevail. 96 ix. 11 . Oo ge 6ozhetoon (inan.) . . he made it. ix. 6. Oo ge 6onje oozhetoon (id.) . . he has from (it) made it, &c. xix. 23. Oo ge new-oosedoonaftwrfa (id.\ . they four-made it. ix. 14. Ke oozhetoo-pun (id. preter.). . (Jesus) he made it. iv. 1. O'ozheod (subj. anim.). . that he made him or them. ii. 15. Kah 6ozhetoo(2 (id. inan.). . that he had made it. X. 25. WdzhetooyaAniw . . (subj. inan. flat vowel) . . (which) / make them, (continu.) xii. 2. Ke 6oz\ie-X-dhmahwahw6d (subj. dat.). . they made (it) /or him. xvii. 24. Ch^pwah oozhechegahdat^ (par. pass, subj.) . . before t^ is (was) made, i. 3. Kah k&goo tah ge oozhechegahd^moon (particip. pass.) . . not any-thing it would have been made not. fl THE CREE LANGUAGE. 167 Note. — ^The emphatic or causative, t, affixed to a verbalized noun, is (with its distinctive accented vowel) correspondent in character to Angl. &c. -fy, as, Net' assinee-Ta-n, (Chip. -too-») / petri.FY-t7, lit. I stpne-Do-tV, or, cause, change, it into stone, (pp. 18. 19. 121.) Vide infra. The "intensive" English term, make, used indifferently in respect of things, qualities, and actions, is, in Cree, rendered vari- ously by the Signs above mentioned, as, Muskesine-K-oyoo (intran9.)...Ae shoe-MAKEs, is shoe-mak- ing. Mithkoo-T-ow (trans.). ..Ae makes it red, i.e. redd-ENS it. Kiaaew&-H-ayoo (id.)., he angers him, makes him angry. WAppe-H-o...Ae wtM . . . Ac wi/A-draws (id.), takes away, it.'-*'' Ithl:'a-h-M»i.../ie lessens, sucks up, it, (as with a bucket, sponge, &c.) lth'ek-ht..,it is cold (to the touch). Awk'w-uttiM...i< is frozen. Ath'im-un...t/ is bad, difficult. Awk'w-«7t...»7 is very bad, sore, acrid. A'ash,-gdt/oo (trans. )...Ae feeds. Muk'oo-sayoo...Ae feasts. Sesk'e-^a^oo (accid. pass.)...iV is lighted. Awk'w-dwk'oo-/fl^oo (id.)...t/ blazes. Nipp&-h-ayoo...Ae kills him or them. Skvfk'-h-ayoo...he massacres, slaughters, them. It-ethe-t-um...Ae so-thinks it. Kisk-ethe-t-MOT...Ae knows i7. 174 A OKAMMAR OF Thiik'e-n-ayoo...he pushes him. K-wk'-kvfk'n-ayoo...hethrustB him (with force). It'tiimoo-t-(/rr...Ae attaches it (to something). Ktk'iimoo-t-rfw.../jc sticks, fastens, it (id.). l-(mttae-h-d]foo...he speaks (to) him. '• K6t'oo-i-ayoo...he noise-eth, reproveth, him. K6ga'm-atfoo...he scolds him. Oot'e-n-egayoo...he takes. M\isk'ii-t-vfdi/oo. .he takes forcibly, robs. Oot6mma-w-dtfoo...hc hammers, beats, him. Puck'omma-w-oyoo ..he strikes with force, knocks, him. Too'-i-um...he does it. Kask'e-t-on).../ie causes, effects, it. j Ass'e-n-um...he assembles, brings together, them. M6w'utche-t-on>...Ae accumulates, heaps together, tkcm. Metho-6themo_yoo.. he well-thinks, likes, him. Cheek'-6themayoo.. Ae thinks highly of, esteems, him. Skk''e-h-flyoo...Ac loves him. A*t'ow-6the-m-»yoo ..Ae anti-thinks, dislikes, him. Puk'wa-t-ayoo...Ae hates him. Oot6ete-n-ayoo... he attacks him. M6oak6esta-wayoo...he rushes upon him. Ootum'e-h-a^oo...Ae disturbs, interrupts, him. Mick^ooskkche-h-'istow-ask-oosto»j> . . .between-wood(8)-puts-//f it. 178 A GRAMMAR UF V In A Veru with a Verb, one being in the relation of Gervnik Pcsk-ootayoo...tire-walketh-Ae, he is tired by walking or going about. I'eskoo-t&p&yoo...tire-hauleth-Ae... he is tired by hauling, e.g. a sledge. An Adverb with a Verb. Nuskw-uttin...quick.freezes-i<, it freezes suddenly. Sok-^themoo (reflect.)... Ae very -thinks, -intends, is resolute. 'flie following Adverbial prefixes are thus in very frequent use, viz. oot-, or wet; from; it-, tOipe-,pey',or peyt-, hitherward; i»«c- , fromward, away. (Chip, oonj-, ezhe-fhe-, ahne-.) i^ Preposition with a Verb. Tc>t-astow.../te sur-places it, places it upon (something). To this head also belongs a manner of expression which is of frequent occurrence in Indian speech, and requires our especial notice. Certain generic nouns or names (few in number, and chiefly used m Composition) are constantly annexed to the attri- butive when the Subject of the Verb comes under either of such classes. Note. — In the English phrase these generic expressions are generally omitted as expletive, or not necessary to precision. The principal of these Substantive signs are the following : -ask-, signifying. Wood; -appisk-. Metal or Stone; -gum-, Liquid or Liquor; -pegg-. Line or Cord; -puck-. Leaf; -gommik. House, &c. Thus speaking of (e.g.) a stick or tree, mistick, we say, ^Kinw-oosu...Ae is long.] . K.myf-dsk'Oosu...\ong-wood-\s-he. Angl. (simply) it is long. ^Wflg-iss?«...Ac is crooked.] W^- dsk-i^u . . . crooked- wood-is- he. Angl. it is crooked. Of a Stone, assinnee ; a Metal, pew-dppisk ; as, £W6w-i88M...Ae is round.] 'W6yfe-dppisk-isau...roun({-slone-is he. Angl. it is round. Of Water, &c. nippee, &c. as, (^Tak-ow...it is cold.] THE CREE LANGUAGE. 179 Take-^/(?w-«,..col(l-/i(/«»rf-is-j7. Angl. it is cold. Tk]ie-gum-un'\]p]^ee...co]d-liqmd-is-it the water, the water is cold. ' •!:;.. -.i I^Kimv-ow/.,.*'/ i* long. I^ppee...a cord.^ '' K inwd-p(^g.un . . Aong-cord-is-it. Angl. it is long. QSak-c/iM...»7 is (come) forth. JVeepcea...leaves.3 Siikc-pHck-()w...'issue-leaf-is-it. Angl. the lemws are out. Es]p-(isk-'w-\otv...high-tvood-is-it. It is high woods. Mistick-w-(/.y^'-oo-sk<:)n>...tree-wooJ-thick-M it. It is thick woods, a forest, -skow, augment, p. 70. Note 38. The secondary attributive may itself be a Compound,^^ as, ilfi//tA'oo-»»'n-dppwooy...rc...t7 is large, great. MEECH'-6t...a GREAT many. < PEECH'-ofP...a GREAT distance il is. W6we-Ai8t(...t< is full (moon) ; from Wow-issu...t7 is round. 4. A Repetition of initial letters ; &c. as, P&-pamoot&yoo...Ae walks about (Fr. il se promene) ; from p6mootayoo...Ae walks. K...he is stopped up. Ar£f-NEV-lwissu...Ae is ashamed, MORTi-fied ; from Ni'p-«, he is dead. WASK'-umme-k^sick.. .a clear-liquid-sky; from WASEo'um- mu, it is clear liquid. &c. Note. — ^The Derivatives here alluded to seem to be analogous to such English words as the following : (to) Don, ooff, &c. from on, off, &c. Kinds of Verbs. Returning to the second head of the first General division of our subject (p. 15), we have to observe that the Verb may be considered as of three kinds — the Impersonal, the Intransitive, and the Transitive, in their various modes, as already exemplified. Forms. The forms of the Verb, as exhibited in its numerous inflections, are the subject of the last General head, which comprises the topics of Conju- gation, Voice, Mood, Tense, &c. in the positive, suppo- sitive, and doubtful (and, in the Chippeway, negative) forms. (See Accidence.) THE CREE LANGUAGE. 181 PART II. ACCIDENCE. Chapter I. Sect. I. Having, in the preceding pages, given an outline of the Cree and Chippeway Verb and its forms, 1 proceed now to enter more fully into the grammatical details of these languages — and, first, OF THE NOUN. The Cree and Chippeway Noans are divisible into two classes^ analogous to those of Gender in European languages, but more appropriately denominated, in these tongues, the Animate and the Inanimate classes — the former in the plural ending in -iik or -tviik (Chip, -iig, -og, or -tvug), the latter in -S (Chip, -een, -wra).'"" CREF. CHlPPEfVAY. A Bear Mi'iskwah Mukwah Bears Mi'iskw-M^ Mdkw-wg' A Duck S^eseep Sh^esheep Ducks S^es6ep-«^ Sh^esh^ep-ug '«« i. 6. 30. En^neA (homo). . a man. i. 4. Endnewujp (id.) . . men, people, xxi. 12. Oog'emaA . . a chief, " the Lord." vii. 2C. xix. 6. Oog'emo^r. . chiefs, " the rulers," " officers." i. 1. Ek'edoowin . . a word, vii. 0. Ekedoowin-Hw . . words, 182 A GRAMMAR OF A Shoo Mi'ihkesin Miikesi!) Shoes ) Miiskca'in-f? MuckVsin-«M A River Sdepec Seepee Rivers S6epee-rlf Sccpce-WMM A person Vil Persons r-McA"" A thing Vit Things r-ce ii' The Animate plural, -uk (Chip, -ug), is, when in regimen with the third person, changed into tt (Chip. -mm). See Syntm: Many Inanimate nouns, however, from possessing some real ov imaginary Excellence, are personified or class as Animates. Abstract and InslrumctUive nouns, ending respectively in -win and 'gfin (sing.), class as Inanimates. t ■ Note. — ^This Substantive ending, -win, appended to verbal roots, or their formatives, is equivalent, generally, to the English terminations, -Mice, -ness, -ment, -ion, -ty, ing, &c. as is, in like manner, the termination -gun to the -er, &c. of English Instrumentivc nouns. The Substantive termination -kon, quasi, " made," is used to signify an image or representation of a thing. Nisk2i...a goose; ^isk-ek6n... an artificial goose, used by the Indians as a decoy. Watec.a vault or hole in the earth. Wdtec-k6n...an artificial vault, u cellar. Mistick...a tree ; Mistick-oo-kon ..an artificial tree, a long pole fixed up, e.g. as a beacon, &c. Oow^ssis...a child; Oowfissis-ek^n-tf (dim. )...i\ little arti- ficial child, a doll. Nouns have their Diminutives, ending, in the singular number, in -is or -oos. "" vii, 25. A'hyahojf. . person*, " them." ii\, 12. A'hyce>n thing.v. rilE CREE LANOUAfS. 183 •win Mou»t'u()s, n buflfalM (bisr..) Mistick, a tree Mook'otntin, a knife Assinnee, n stone "'■ » Moodt'oosW I Mistick-ocu */ ,>' " M6okom&n-tJ Assinn-u t f It may be added, that the force of the Diminulive is encrcased, generally, by the " conversion" of the casual, as well as the " constant," *, into its cognates sh, or (l)sh (l)ch, especially the latter, as, .1 Oow4s8is...a child. , Oowdshish...a little child. Oowi\(t)chee(t)ch...a very little chihl. Note. — ^The above modification of the Consonant seems analogous tn Angl. " little" when pronounced " leettle ;" &c. In some cases a modification of the Diminutive sign, ftn, -ah, -aish, or aitch, signifies mean, defective, contemptible, &c. Or Cases. ^^^■^-'' '■■ •■^■'>tf!V Tlje Cases of the Noun are transferred to the Verb (see I'art I.), with the exception of the Vocative, which, in Cree, takes in the plural, -elik.'^'^ Woman! Eskwayoo! . • < ■ Women! Eskway w-c/i'ci ! Such a one ! V(i\ Id. plnr. l'.et(ck! The Ablative case also may be expressed (as well as by the Verb, p. 121) by the Preposition ooi'cAc (Chip, oon'je), from, with, 8iC, placed before or after its noun, &c. (See Syntax.) O/* leather (material) With a needle (instrument) Pahk'^ggin oot'che. S^p6o-n-egun (pierc-er) ool'che. ">2 iv. 11. Equd . . a woman. viii. 10. Equ&! ..(0) woman! '• ~ iv. 11. Oog'cmah! . . (0) chief, sir! xi. 41" xii. 27. 28. AToosff ' . . (O) father! 184 A GRAMMAR OF FrotH the tent (at) Mvcg'ewAp«tcA oot'chc From the ceiling (e.g. it hangs, EnjAm-ickoot'che, i.e.fromonhigh or fnlls) Bkcavmb it rains Hi liimmeyvdk (subj.) oofche The cognate labials (for so I designate them, vide infra), ou nnd m, arc, in certain positions, possettive signs— the former when prefixed (in the possess, verb, p. 140), the latter when affixed, to the noun possessed — ^both generally expressing the force of the English " intensive" term, own, as,'"'' Ustis... a mitten or glove; Ustis-u^... gloves. Net' usti8-im...my own glove. Net' U8tis-i'm-u^...my own gloves. Note. — Oo (or oot) is a mode of the preposition oolfche, of, from, &c. The Local (or Locative) case, as it has been appropriately called, is expressed by the affixed sign, 'k or -g, with generally a connecting vowel, as, -ak, -ik, ok, (Chip, -g, -ug, -ing, -ong, &c.) implying, at, in, on, &c. as,'"* W&tee...a vault or cave. Wdtee-A:... vault-in, in a, or the, vault. Mewi'it...a bag. Mewiit-i'^ ..in the bng. Mistick...a tree. IVli8tick-d^...tn or on the tree. >«3 iv. 32. vi. 27. M^jim . . food, " meat." iv. 34. Ne m^jim>tni . . my food, " my meat." iv. 23. Kezhig . . day, " hour." vii. 30. Oo kezhig-oom . . his day, " his hour." Oog^emah . . chief, principal, king, xii. 15. Kementione(l " constant" element (k or g) h affixed to the tatter, as,'"* / [[iVc wut...my bag. •/ Ne yv\xt-ik...in my bag. iVi? wut-CNaH... our (1.3.) bag.3 Ne wut-eniU...tn our bag. lied, ting , at, Section II. OF THE PRONOUN. The Algonquin Pronouns are, as in European lan- guages, Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite. Personal. Pronouns. CREE. CHIPPBWAY. I Nahil Neen Thou K6th& Keen He or it Wdthft Ween We (/ and he, or / Netha-nan N6n-awun and they) We (/ and thou, or K6thu-now Kdn-awun » / and ye) Yo K6tha-wow K6n-ahwah They W6tha-wow Wdn-ahwah '05 [xix. 11. 2Ve yowh . . my body, " me." XV. 4. 5. Ne ydhwi no. . in my body, " in me." XX. 20. Oopema 00 weydwh . . the side (oO his body, " his side." iii. 36. Oo wdy4hwtn$r . . in or on his body, "on him."] ix. 19. Ke gwes-ewaA . . your son. V. 38. viii. 37. XV. 4. Ke y6Avw-ew6ng . . in your body, " in you," xvi. 6. Ke di-ewd-ng . . in your heart. viii. 17- X. 34. Ke k^hgckw&win-ewff-n^ . . in yow law. viii. 21. Ke bahtahzc\vin-ctc(f-n(7 . . in ynur wickedness, sins. 186 A (iUAMMAR OF I'USBESSIVE l*noNoUNS...Abi4olutC. The I\)ssos.sive Promiuns arc exprossctl before nouns as tho IVi-sonal before verbs, thnt is, in the abbreviated (onn ; in tlu« fullitwing examples, however, (with a few others) we have N' instead of Net' ; K' instead of Kef; and euphony suppresses the Got of the tliiril person. '"" (Sec I'osa. I'ron. Itelat.) "'« ii. 16. V. 17. vi. 32. &c. JVoos . . my father, viii. 19. K'ooa . . thy father, vi. 42. Oo8-un . . his father, iv. 12. viii. 53, N'ooaendn (1.3.) . . our father, viii. 38. 41. 44. 56. K'oosewdh . . your father, iv. 20. vi. 31. N'ooaendn-ig (1.3.) . . our fathcr-s. vi. 49. 58. K'oosew(f-gi . . your father-^. vi. 51. Ne wt'yos . . my flesh. iv. 49. Ne ncjiihnis . . my child. vii. 6. 8. Mn k^zhc^-oom . . my day, " time." v. 24. NincT eked6owin . . my word. X. 16. Nind* enwdywin . . my saying, " voice." iv. 50. xix. 26. Ke gwis . thy son. V. 8. Ke nub&h^in . . thy bed. iv. 42. Ked' ckcdoowin . . tky saying, word. vii. 3. Ked' uhnookewin-un . . thy labours, works. i. 42. 45. Oo gwesun . . his son. vi. 52. Oo w^yos . . his flesh. V. 28. Ood' ckedoowin . . his voice. i. 27. Oo malikezin-ttn . . his shoe-s. iii. 21. Ood' czhechegdwin-un (act.) . . his doing-s, " his deeds." iii. 11. Nin debdhjemdowinenott (1.3.) . . our relation, " witness." ix. 19. Ke gw6a-ewah. . your son. ix. 41. Ke bdhtahz^win-nvtfA . . your badness, " sin." xix. 14. Ked' oog'emdhm-ewaA . . your chief, " king." vii. 6. Ke kezhig-oom-PiorfA . . your day. iii. 1. xix. 19. Ood' oog'emahm-ewon . . their chief. iii. 19- Ood' ezhcchegdwin-ew(fA (act.) . . their doing, " deeds." viii. 17. On tebahjcmoowin-pH'fl'A . , their relation, " testimony." TIIR CRBK LANaUAGR. m VHEE. Mif lather iV'ootiiwfe Thif futlicr K'oot4wce His f iitlu r Ootiiwec Our ( / and he) father iV'ootdwec-«/i« Our ( / ami lliou) K'lmifiy/ev-ndtv Your K'wjtdvceu-cotvOtv Their Ootdv/cc-ixmotv My fathcrv Thy futhcrv His fathers Our (I and hu) &c. Our (I and thou) &c. Your iathcrA- Their tathcr« N'ootawee-MA K'ootiiwee-K^ Ootdwce-d N'oottiwce-nun-u^ K'ootiiwce-now-uA K'ootawee-oow6w-M^ K'oo8'-ew6-g Oot4wee-oowow-ti Oos'-ewAh-woM niil'PKWAV. N\mn K'ooa Cos ' N'ooH-en6n K'w>&'-cnlm K'ooa-ctvdh Oon'-etvon N'oos'-Mf' K'oos'-K^ Oos'ww N'oos'enun-ig K'oo8'-en(>n-i,(f PossEHHivE PnoNou Nii . . . Relative. These are no other than the Possessive form of the Generic Noun I'a, Angl. person or thing. (Sec p. 135.) The Chippcways ntid the Possessive m. (p. 184). CREE. Singular. ciitPPEfrAV. Net' I'a-n (i.e. my thing), mine (=my-n) Nind ahy'ce-m Kef I'an, thine (= thy-n) Oof I'an, his (= his-n, vulg.) Net' I'an-en4n (1.3.), ours Kef I'an-cn6w (1.2.), ours Ket' I'an-oow6w, yours Oof I'an-oowow, theirs Plurai Net' I'an-uk, mine (Fr. Ics miens) Kef I'an-uk Oof I'an-u Nef Tan-enan-uk (1.3.) , .,, „ Kef ran-en6w-uk (1.2.) , Kef ran-oow6w-uk Oot' I'an-oowow-Jl Ked' ahy'eem Ood' ahy'eon Nind ahy'eem-enon Ked' ahy'eem-enun Ked' ahy'eetn-ew&h Ood' ahy'ee»i-ew«)n Nind ahy'eem-ug Ked' uhy'eem-ug Ood' ohy'eem-un Nind ahy'eem-enon-ig Ked' ahy'cem-en6n*ig Ked' ahy'eeOT-ewft-g Ood' ahY'('c?«-cwiih-wor 188 A (iRAMMAK OF This (aniin.) (innn.) These (iinini.) (inan.) That (aiiim.) (inan.) Those (onini.) (inan.) I'aoNouNH Demonstrativc. '0'^ CREE. villi'. Ow'A Oum'it Ook'uo (or Ook'ce) 06ho« (or Oohcc) UnnA UnncmA Unnekce Unnchec Wowh Oowh Oogoowli Oonoowh Owh Ewh Egewh Endwh Singular. cube. Plural. A'ywokoo (onim.), the self same A'ywokw-unnick A'ywokoo (inan.), id. A'ywokw-Cinnee (See Stftttax.) I ■<>7 i. 15. Mt^sah wdwh k&h deb&hjemaA^(u(7)-^bun.. why this (is he) whom / related Aim. ix. 19. M^nah lurficA ke gwia-ewdh ....?.. why (is) this your son. . ? ii. 16. M&hj^wentit oog'oowh (anim. plur.) . . take ye away these. xvii. 1 1 . Oog'oowh. . ahk'eettjr ahy&hwu^^. . these the world-m they are. iv. 15. OowA ndbeh .. Mis water. xvi. 17. W4goon&in oowh knenung (subj.) . . what (is) this (which) lie soith to us. viii. 40. K(ih ween oovih kc czhechegfise . . not this he has not done. iii. 22. Oonoowh . . these, " these things." XX. 31. Oon'oowh' . . ke oozh'cbeegahd&wun (part. pass.). . these have been written, xxi. 24. Wowh minzhcnaw4 kdh debuhdoodun*/ oon'oowh . . this (is) the disciple who narrateth, " testifieth of," these (things). viii. 10. E'gewh dnahmem^M^ (subj.) . . those (who plur.) accuse-fAee. xvii. 12. Eghih koh m^enzh4/(iAn(yun)ijr . . . those whom thou, hast given me, them. iii. 1 1 . Evoh kak^indahme^^ . . that we know Ewh kah w&hbundahmdn^ . . that which we saw. iv. 37. Ewh ^cdoowin . . that saying. viii. 29 Enewh mknwkxnAiingin . . those [things'] (which) he approves them. TIIK CUGK LANUUAGfc:. Ib9 Prunounh Relative. The Pronoun Relative, referring (in Crce and Chippeway) to a definite or an indefinite antecedent, is represented— the former by the indeclinable particle kd or gd (Chip, kah, JoNEfi)<--the latter by the " flat vowel" (p. 16*8). See Syntax. Who? (Hing.) (plur.) What? What (thing) Which? (anim.) (inan.) Pronouns iNTtRRoaATiVE.'**" CRBK. CHIP. Ow'enii Wain'ain' Ow(n-ekec Wain'ain'-ug K6koo KAgoo Kdkwan Wiigoonain' Kdkw^in-ce (things) Wagoonain'-un TAnJl Ttlnemah (anim. plur.) Ttin-Anekee (inan. id.) Tiln-dnehee Pronouns Indefinite. ^'^ Some one, any one Ow'eilk Ah'we& Something, anything K6kwan Kdgoo Whosoever Ow'en& Wdgwain Whatsoever K^kwan WAgoodoogwain '»9 viii. 25. xxi. 12. Wdndin k^en 1 ..who (art) thou i ix. 36. W&n&in 6wh ? . . who (is) that ? xvi. 18. Wdgoondin ewh idung . . . what (is) that (which) he says, means, iv. 27. Witgoon&in aind'ahw&indaAmun i . . what seekest thou ? "^ xiii. 28. Kah (dush) dhweyah . . (now) not any one, " no man." viii. 33. Kah w^ah dhweyah . . not ever, " never," any one. XV. 6. K^shpin 6hweyah . . if any one, " if a man." * XV. 5. K&h ween kdgoo . . not any thing, " nothing." xiii. 29. Kd^oo che min6d . . something that he give (to) them. xix. 12. Wdgwdin wfigem&hwe-^de^roogwlun (reflect, dub.). . whosoever chief-maketh-himself. lOO A UKAMMAK (ll<' Section III. t I. • • p F T 11 E V E 11 B. Paiiauiimmi 1. The Algon(|uiii Verb r ..y be considered sus of three Kinds, namely, the linperHonsil, tiie Intransitive, and (he Transitive. First, oC the Imprrsonal. JVo/r. — Tho uront olmtrnclion to a Thcorctionl knowledge of tlicMt tonguoN Ih foun<] in thu mnnifoUI powcrH and nnomalouH Htnirttiro ttf the verb. Tlio root uniting with/onna/ire Hignn of ditFcrcnt Nignifiention and prrsnnal nigns in ditVerent relntionn, in often in a manner lost ainongHt its acceHHories. To so|mrate thcHe — tonNHign to each its proper meaning — to ascertain the various order in which they respectively combine —is, to tlu> learner of these languages, only oral, an undertaking of no ordinary magnitude ; an unwearying diligence, joined with much i)ractice, can alone accomplish it. These difficulties, however, overcome, we discover in tho varying forms of the Indian verb a number of elements or signs — not, as some imagine, arbitrarily linked together, but aystematically com- bined, on a plan founded on certain laws, which fit them to perform, in their several relative jKisitions, every required purpose of Construction — of Language, in a manner as effective, and, viewed as a whole, as simple, as that of the corrc8iM)nding elements, or words, in langimges where the verb has a less compounded form. With this complex subject, then, !)cforc us, and having already noticed. v. 1. Wjigwuin(du8h)nctum bukoobc^wuin . whosoever (" then") first waded, entered the water, vi. 54. W&gwain mahjci/wain . . whoso eatcth it. \\. 26. WAg\vWn (dush) pam&htezaTwain . . whosoever (and) livetli. xii. 50. Wdgdodoogwain . . ewh ikedooydn . . whatsoever that (which) / speak, w. 1(5. W&g6odoog^vain ka undoodahmahwrfAwa'giwain. . whatsoever ye shall request (of) him. xvi. 13. Wagoodoogwain ka noond'ahmoo//wnin . . whatsoever //c shall hear. TIIK ( KKK l.<\N(.i;.UiR. 1!)I iiiiilir till' lii'iul of iK'rivatuf VorliH, tlii> formative Hi^rit roniiictiii^ the ronl with the intlcctinn, we no |irococ, nil the inodifyinK cir- cnmHtaiiceH of ('oiijiigation, Voire, Mood, Tchho, Number, and I'erHon (anim. and inan.); that it in, in Hhort, tho European wrh — but HomotimuH much more (p. 77). The MinhIb will he ootiHidercd as tlirec in niimhcr, vl/.. the (ndi« nitive, t)u! Suhjunctive, and the Imperative. The Indleative Is declarative, ahsoliitcly. The Subjunctive Ih, n\uo, declarative, l>ut rclativehf or dependcntly only. See Si/titnjr. The En^li.sh Infini- tive is, as already observed, resolved int(» tin* Subjunctive. The En^liNll Participle Pnisent is expressed (as in French) by a personal verb. (Vide infra.) Note. — From the PrcRcnt of the aliovc moodn are formed their other tcnflCH respectively. INDICATIVK. '"• PrcH. P(-poo»...t7 is winter. Prct. lY'poon-oo/>'Mw...i/ was winter. Fut. Kiilti^ pepoon.-.tV mill be winter. Comp. of pres. Kc pt'poon...iV has (been) winter. Comp. of pret. Kc p6poon-oo/)Mn...t7 had (been) winter. '"» [v. 9. Ewh kczhig . . that day.] V. 10. AlinahmciUkezhegMrf. . it is ])ray(ing)-day,"thc Sabbath day." ix. 4. Pt'-tel)ckud . . hither-night it is, night comcth. V. 9. ix. 14. A'hnahmefi-kt'zhcgud-tfopun . . .it was pray (ing) -day, the Sabbath. xiii, 30. TebckoArf(ud)-rfoittn . . it was night. X. 22. Pepoon-<^o6ttn . . it was winter. xviii. 18. Ke8en&hmahgaAd(iM?)-rfo6un . . it was cold (weather). xviii. 23. Kckezhap&hwahgaM(ud) rfoftun . . it was early (in the morn- ing). 192 A GRAMMAR OF Pres. Pret. Put. Comp. of pres. Comp. of pret. Indef. Tense SUBJUNCTIVE.'" (He) pep6oA'...(as) it is winter. (He) pep6oA--oopu»...(as) it was winter. Pepoo/t<^...«»Ae« it shall (be) winter. (He) ke pep6oA...(as) it has been winter. (He) ke pepooA'oopM»...(as) it had been winter. P«poo/<; (flat vow.)... when it is winter, or Angl. in the winter. The Preterite, and the Compound of the Present, Tenses are analogous in use, as well as in signification, to the same tenses in the French lang :age. Pauaoraph n. The Intransitive verb has, in its several conju- gations, two forms, namely, the Animate or Personal, and the Inanimate, which last has the third person only (pp. 131. 181.). The Personal pronouns, when in connect'on with the verb, are abbreviated or " converted" thus, 1, Ne, or (before a vowel) Net ; 2, Ke or Ket ; 3, Oo or Oot. (p. 51.) [Chip. Ne, Nin, or Nind ; Ke or Ket ; Oo or Ood."] Note. — ^The sign of the third ;;^3rson is not prefixed in the Present tense ; in Cree it is affixed. The first and second persons singular (Indie.) have their terminations alike. Cree — Indicative Singular. 2 |.(Ne,&c.) Nip-an -an -ow(I, &c.) sleep. / 2.(Net',&c.) Ap-in -in -u sit. 3. (Ne, &c.) P^moot-iin -an -dyoo walk. 4. (Ne, &c.) Ket-6on -oon -oo speak. .^.(NetS&c.) Ach'-dn -en -eoo move. 6. (Nef, &c.) It^thet-en -6n -lim think. 7. (Ne, &c.) Tuckoos-innin -innin -in arrive (by land) •11 ix. 4. Magwah . . kezheguA . while it is day. vii. 23. .4'nahmea-kezhegoAt-iw (fiat vowel) . . when (indef.) it is pray-day, on the &c. VI. 22. xii. 12. Ahpe kah wuhhunjr. . the time that i7 iws day-light, i.e. the morrow. THE CttEE LANGUAGE. 193 The Plural of the Present, Indicative, is formed, by adding to the respective Sing. Persons (with sometimes a connecting vowel) the suffixes following, viz. Cree. — 1 Plur. (1.3.) -nan; 1 plur. (1.2.) -a-now; 2 plur. -owow ; 3 plur. -lik or -wiik. Chippeway. — 1 Plur. (1.3.) -min ; 1 plur. (1.2.) -min; 2 plur. -m ; 3 plur. -ug or -vvug (see below) : as. Plural. 1 (1.3). 1 (1.2). 2. 3. 1. Ap'-inwa» -indnow -inow6w -evfuk. 2. Nip-iinnflM -dndnow -dnowoa) -ovfiik. 3. P^moot-anHflw -imdnow -anowdw -aywiik. 4. K^t-oonna» -oondnow -6onow6w -6owuk 5. Ach'-euMaw -endnov) -enowow -6wuk. 6. Itethet-enna're -endnow -6nowdw -Amwuk. 7. Tuckoos-inninnrfn -innindnow -mninowdw -inwiik. Chippeway — Indicative, Sinoular."^ 1. 2. 3. l.(Nind,&c.)A'hb ... -6h (I, &c.) sit. 2. (Ne, &c.) Neb-ah -ah -Kh &c. 3. (Ne, &c.) Pemoos-a -a .& 4. (Nind, &c.) Ekid ... -6o 112 ix. 25. Ne w6b . . I see. ix. 7- Ke pe-wahb(wob)eA . . he did hither-see, " came seeing." xxi. 9- Ke ahbe/{ . he was lying, being, viii. 2. Ke nahmahd-ahbeA . . he sat down, ix. 41. ^e wahb-ewiin. . we (1.3) see. vi. 10. Ke nahmahd-ahbewM^ . . they sat down, xiv. 19. Ne bemahtis . . /live. viii, 53. Ket ahpet-aind^hgoos (indef. pass.) . . .thou art so- much- thought, esteemed, considered. V. 50. 51. Pemahteze . . Aeliveth. ix. 9. Ezhe-nahgooseA (indef. pass.) .. he'iB so-seen, resembles. X. i. Kemoode-shkeA (freq.) . . he steals-often, is a thief, xi. 3. A'hkooze. . he is sick, xvi. 7- Ked en-aindahgoozim . . ye are so-thought, considered. I 194 A GRAMMAR OF I ' l I I I 5. (Nind, &c.) Aunj' ... -ch 6. (Nind, &c.) Enaind'-um -um -urn 7. (Ne, &c.) Tuhgwesh-in -in -in Note. — In the first, fourth, and fifth conjugations, the Chippeways drop the (Cree) inflections of the first and second persons (sing.) . xiii. 10. Ke b^neztm . . ye are clean. V. 25. Tah bemaiitez^wM^r . . they shall live. vi. 17. 24. Ke hoozewug . . they embarked. .\i. 1 1 . Nind ezhn'A . . / go. viii. 21. xiv. 28. Ne mahja/t . . / go away, depart. xii. 36. iv. 43. Ke mahjrfA . . he went away. ii. 12. Ke ezhrfA ewede . . he went there. vi. 67. Ke we mdhjrfm . . ye wish to go away. iv. 45. Ke ezhah-wuf^. . they have gone, " went." xvi. 7. Nin dapwrf . . / true-say, tell the truth, iv. 17. 18. Ke tapwrf. . fhou tellest the truth, vii. 1 . Ke pahpahmoosa . . he walked about, iii. 4. Tah beendega . . will or can he enter. *} 4. 6. vii. 21. Nin ge ezhechega (indef.). . I have done, executed. iii. 10. Ke kekenooiihmahga . . thou teachest. xii. 34. Nin ge noondahgamm . . we (1.3) have heard. viii. 38. 41. Ket ezhechegaiwi . . ye do. iv. 38. Ke ke beendegaim. . ye have entered. X. 34. Nin ke ekid . . I have said. viii. 52. Ket ekid . . thou sayest. i. 42. Ke kah ezhenekaus (reflect.) . . thou shalt be named. i. 42. ix. 38. Ke ekedoo . . he has said. X. 30. Ne bazhegoomm . . we are one. iv. 20. ix. 41. xiii. 13. Ked ekedoom . . ye say. viii. 21. Ke gah neboowt . . ye shall die. viii. 53. Ke neboowug . . they have died. vi. 14. 42. Ke ekedoowu^r . . they have said. xxi. 25. xvii. 24. Nind enaindum . . I think, will, intend. xvi. 2. Tah enaindum . . he will think. iv. 42. vi. 69. Nin tapwa-aindahmm . . we (1.3) true-think, believe. xvi. 31. Ke tapwa-aindom . . ye believe. xviii. 3(1. Ked enaindo/n nah. .t ..ye think, will, intend {nah, inter.)? xiii. 29. Ke enaind^hmon^r . . they have thought. i' * -3 I UK ( RKK LANGUAGE, 195 1 (1.3) ipeways :ve. r.)? 1. Ahb-e/«/« 2. Neb-i'ih?wi« •"J- Pemoos-iwiin 4. EkkUoimiin 5. Aunj -e/«rw 6. Enaind-ah?««« 7. Tiihgwesh- inc/wj« -inemt'n 1 (1.2) -emin -dhmin -dmin -(mmiii -emin -ahjnm I'M'RA/,, -un -ahm -HOT -00//J -ahwj -inm •ehwug. -khwiig -kwug. -i')OWllg. -€wng. '•\imoog. 'inxvug. Tlie Pronouns which, in the Indicative, are prefixed to the Snigular number are prefixed also, in the same form, to the Plural as below ; ' Note.-Thx^ seems analogous to the Provincial French, faime. CREE.-iVcket-uon,/ speak; iiTe ketoon, /Ao« speakest ; Ketoo, Ae speaks; iVe ket6on.«a«, rve (1.3.) speak; KcUu^rv-Hnow, we (1.2.) speak ; Ke ket6on-o«,o;«, ye speak ; Ketoo-WM/l, they .speak. CHiPPEWAV._M«rf ekid, / speak ; Ked 6kid, thou speakest ; «kido(,,Ae speaks; M«rfekid6o.m«, «;e( 1.3.) speak ; iTerf 6ked6o. mm, we (1.2.) speak ; Ked ^ked('.o.»,, ^e speak ; ^ked6o.«;«^, they Ckee — Subjunctive, Singular. 1. 2. 3. 1. Ap-e«» -eun -it 2. Nip-Ifl/i -Tun •iit .'i. Pem6ot-e«'M -€un -St 4. Ketoo-yrtM -yun -t .'). Ach'-erfw •inn -^t fi. Ethethet-ummow -I'lmmwM -hk 7. T'uckoos-inne«w -inne? (»•:*)• 1 (1.2). 2. a 1. Ap-ef)/t -e^/fc -edig 'itwdw 2. Nip-T«/{- .w^. -iaig -itwow ' • IV. .5. xi. 28. Ke tahgweshiw . . ke has arrived, xi. 32. Ke ahpungeshiw, . . he (she) has fallen. o2 196 A UKAMMAK OF -enig -aitwrfw -yiig 'tw6w -edig -ctwdw -ummdig -hku'6w -inneyJig' -eeku'dw 3. Vem(Sot-e()k -eiU- 4. Ket6o-y(ik -yiik 5. Ach'-edk -eak 6. Etdthet-umnw)^ -umni»^- ?• Tuckoos-inne/)^ -innea^ CllIPPEfTAY Sl'DJUNTTIVE, SlNGULAU. "* 1. 2. 3. 1. Ahb-ey(>M -^yun -\d 2. Neb-Ahy(iM -ahyun -orf .'J. Pemoos-ayfirt -kyun -airf 113 1. ix. 11. Ke wahbe-j/on . . (and) / have seen, " received sight." ix. 10. Kah ezhe-wahbeyuft . . that thou so-seest. ix. 39. Che wahbewrfd (defin.) . . that they see. W&hyfihbe_/t(jf (ihdef. flat vow.). . they who see. 2. xiii. 36. A'zhahyon . . (whither) / go. Ahn' eende kzh&hyun ?. . whither goest thou ? xiii. i. Che czhod . . that he (should) go. V. 29. Che ezhahwc^d . . that they go. vi. 21. Emah azhahwrfd . . where they went. X. 8. Kah pe-ahy-ezh{ih_;t5f (jilur.) . . who hither-passed, came. 3. viii. 46. Keshpin iiv^waydn . . if / say truth. X. 38. Ki^shpin . . czhechegayon . . if / do. iii. 2. vii. 3. Ewh azhechegayim . . which thou doest. viii. 4. Knkenooahmahgayujt (flat vow.). . thou who teachest/'master." xi. 9. Pemoosatrf . . (if) he walk. v. 24. Ke be'endeg«irf . . he has entered. xiii. 15. Che ezhechegayo*^ . . that ye do. XX. 10. Ke k^wawrfrf . . they returned. xiv. 27. Azhe megewawrfd. . as they give. ii. 11. .iidahwaji^r (flat vow.). . they who exchanged, bartered. V. 29. Kah m^noo-ezhecheg&;i(7 . . they who well-do. 4. v. 34. Wainje ekedooyrfn . . whence, " wherefore" / say. .xii. 34. Wainje ekedooyun. . ? . . whence sayest thou . . ? iii. 27. Ke ekedood . . (and) he said. viii. 53. Kah nebood . . who is dead- X. 12. O'ozhemood (dush). . (and) he fleeth. I THE CREE LANGUAGE. 197 4. Kked()o-ydn -y«« -d 5. Aunj-eyng -eyung -eyuig -ewdd 2. Neb-!ihy<5»g -iihy ung -dhy dig -khw6d .•}. Pemoos-ayf/w^ -iiyung -aydig -iiwdd 4. Ekedoo-yo'wg -yinig -y»ig -uod 5. Aunj-eydng -eyung -eydig -ewdd ti. Eniiind-uminoMg -umxnuHg •ummdig -ummoowdd 7. Tahgwesh-inneyoMg -inneyMH^ -inneydig -innoowdd xiv. 8. Che Aiiha\ig-&aemooydng (1.3) ..that we eaough-think be satisfied, xvii. 22. A'zhe \mihegooyung (1.2). . as we are one. V. 34 Che ndojemooydig . . that ye escape, vii. 15. Ke ckedoowod . . they said, xvii. 21. Che p&zhegoowdd . . that they be one. b. iv. 53. Kek-aindunr^ . . (thus) he knows, " knew." xvi. 21. \\vmhi/{ug)-mnduiig . , he (she) anguished, xi. 15. xi.\. 35. Che tupway-aindahmaii/ . . that ye may true-think, believe, xiii. 22. Ke gwenahwe-enaindahmoowe^c^ . . . they lack-thought were at a loss, &c. viii. 9. Kah noonduhgig (indef.) . . they who heard. 7. xxi. 22. Nahnonzh tahgweshenrfn . . till / arrive, xvi. 28 Ke tahgweshenrfn . . (and) / am arrived, iv. 25. Ahpt' ke tahgweshiw^/ . . when he has arrived, xi. 41. Email shingeshin^ (sing.) . . there which lay. vi. 26. Kiya tabesin-eyi% . . and ye were filled, vi. 12. Kah t&hesinewdd . . (when) they were filled. V. 3. Shingeshin-ooMJOf/. . they lay. vi. 5. Che wcsenewdd . . that they eat. vi. 13. Kah wesmejig (plur. indef.) . . who eat, had eaten, xii. 12. Kah tahgwe8hing(tsf) . . (id.) who arrived 198 A GRAMMAR OF The pergonal Intransitive verb is represented above as belonging to seven conjugational forms; tlie first four only are however of a GENERAL character, the remainder being of limited use. The third person (sing.) is the Conjugational Sign. It will be proper to remark here that, To the first conjugation belongs the Adjective Verb, pp.25. 27.49. 114. 115. 142. et seq. Neuter (accid.) Verb, p. 14G. Augment, of Manner, -wiss// ; of Energy, -skw. (pp. 69, 70.) Pass. Indef. 115. To the second, the Verb Substantive ; To the third, the Indeter. and Indef. Transitives Active, (p. 104.); and To the fourth, the Reflective, Simulative, Reciprocal ; Accid. and Par- ticip. Passives, Anim. (pp. 82. et seq. 111. et seq.) To the fifth belong some Derivatives of the above Verb. To the sixth, the Compoupds of the above Verb. To the seventh, Pimissin . . he lies (prostrate) and a very few others. To the second and sixth Conjugations belong also the Inanimate -an -an -ow, and -en -en -urn, of the (Cree) Transitive Verb (vide infra). Adjective Verbs, in their Inanimate form (Indie), end in -m, -in (subj. -ik), -01V, -iin (subj. -ak) QDef. pp. 25. et seq. 130.] and -magun Qlndef.] — the Neuter Inanimate ends in -magiin (p. 4*).) ; their Plurals are formed by adding -it, or -wH (Chip, -un or -wiui) to the Singular. (See Accid. Neut. Verbs, p. 14(5.) Paragraph III The Verb - Substantive (p. 135 et seq.) has, in the Algonquin dialects, a " constant" Attributive sign, or Root ; and being a regular verb (of our second conju- gation) it will be given as an Example of the mginner of forming the Intransitives, generally. (Abstract Noun, l-k-win, Being, p. 182.) See pp. 77, 78. The want of the auxiliary verbs, Angl. to "be", and to "have," is adequately provided for — the former is supplied by the Verbal THE CREK LANGUAGE. 199 Inficdio.i, as in the Adjective-verb, e.^'. Mithkw-ow, it is red (Lat. vuh-et) p. 25. — ill the passive liirnis, Sake-hj'A (clef. p. 57) Sake-hoai (iiulef. pp. 107. 110.) he is loved (Lat. am-rt/«r) — as well as in the I'articip.pass., as, Ntpi'i-che-g-. AW I '-aw Nind AHY-ah / am BEing, or existent. 200 A GRAMMAR OF Kef I'-nM Ked A'hy-nh thou art &c. \.6rj-=~i\oo Ahy -lih he is. Net' I'-an-nan Nintl Ahy-tili-miw Tve (l.'A) are. Kef l'-a.n-(inotv Ked Ahy-i'ih-Tni/i we (1.2) are. Kef l'-&n-<)tv6tv Ked Ahy-Ah-wi »/c are. I-6\Y-iik Aliy-ah-fi'M^ thei/ are. Indeterminate. — (Personal Subjecl. p. 98.) l-ii-newoo, or I-ii-hcwmm Ahy-ah-wj thei/ (Fr. on) are. 1 Inanimate. — {Dejin. or Accid.) I'dtv Ahy-ah it is. I-6w-(? Ahy-ah-w«M they are. Indefinite (continuous, inherent, ^-c). \ I-a-magun Ahy-ah-tnuhgu< // is. -tvii , -oon They are. I'RETEniTE."^ Nef I-a, or, Net' I-iWi Nind A'hy-ahn-ahft«« / was &c. Kef I-a, or, Ket' \-\\-ti Ked ahy-ahn-ahftHM thou wast. Oof I-ii, or. Oof l-(\-ti Ahy-dh-bnn he was. Nef I'-a-t-CM Nind ahy-ah-?njH-!'ihbun we (1.3) were Kef I' -A't-iinow Kef I-a-t-o«'(/tt' Oof I-a-t-owow I-a-pun I-d-pun-^ Ked ahy-i'ih-7«iH-ahbun we (l.'i) were. Ked ahy-ali-;n-wahbun i/e were. Ahy'-iih-bun-fg they were. INANIMATE. Ahy-(/A-bun Ahy-iih-bun-ccM «7wasDEing,&c. they were. COMP. I'RES. AND PRET. Ne ke' law Nin ke' (or ge) ahy-ah / have be(en). Ne ke' I-ii or I-a-Ti Nin ke' (id.) ahy-ahn-ahBUN / had be(en). &c. &c. '•* vi. 62. E'wede ahyah-6Mn.. there (the same place) he was (being), xi. 6. Email ahyah-pun . . wh^re he teas. xi. 30. Kayahbe ahyahiure . . still he was. ix. 25. Nin gah-ge'b-eengwan-ah6uM (iter.) . . / was shut-eyed, blind. See Nofp "1. THK CRRK LANGUAGE. 201 fee. lire, ire. e. !te Te. Sec. a). Ke l.6w Ke l-{m.a K« I-A-pun Ke I-a-pun- INANIMATE. Ke Ahy-lih it lias been. Ke Ahy-Ah-wiin they have been. Ke Ahy-i'ih-bun it had been. Ke Ahy-iih-bun -cen Iheij had been. Note. — The si)j[n of the third ])erHon Oo {Oot hefore a vowel), he or she, is, in Cree, prefixeil to the preterite, and ('omp. of the preterite, Indie, only. The ('hippeways omit it altogether in the Intransitive, using it only in the Transitive forma. Note. — ^The Hame element {-hun or -pun) added to a Proper Name, &c. signifies " late," " deceased," &c. Fr. feu. The Cree Preterite tense exhibits Indeed, in its first form (sing.), only the elements of its Suustantive Root, I' it, a thing, or a UKJng; l)ut it will be observed that here, in the verb, they are enunciated differently, the accent being removed from the / to the a, thus. Net' lii (as above) / was. The added -t'l, in the second form, has the force of the emphutic Angl. did. Looking to the other prete- rites, I consider this Cree preterite (anim.) us being also formed from the Present Tense. FUTUIIE. The Future is formed by the particle gii (Chip, kah, Jones), third person giitA (Chip, tuh), prefixed to the Present tense, as Nc gii Lin, I .shall (or will) be ; gutil lou', will he-he, he will be. (See p. 1.99, and Notes, passim.) SuBJUNcxivE, Present, Animate. (See Note 71 •) In this mood the personal subject, instead of preceding the verb as in the Indicative, is expressed by the inflected termination. (P- 77). ahy-ah-^r^H, or -ifdn nhy-iih-ijun iihy-6d (ihy-ah-t/ong (ihy -ah-yung iihy-{\h-ydig nd. I-I-an, or, V-a-ydn I-T'-MH, or, I-ii-yKW I-dt l-i-itk, or, l-a-ydk I-i'-d/c, or, I-ii-ydk l-\-aig, or, l-ii-yaig V-at-woiv (def. time) If /am being, &c. thou art. he is. we (1.3) are. tve (1.2) are. yc are. nhy-ah-wdd (def. time) they are. Ai-dtvh-ik (indof time) fly- i>(\yig (indef time) l/iey are. 202 A (iKAMMAK OF iNDKTEIlMINATtC {Pcrx. SlthJ.) l-ii-itcwik, or !-«-/.• Aliy-iih.vg, or ong If Htcif {Vv, on) be. Ke I- i-y an &C. COM I'. OK PRES. Kf Ahy-i'ih-yrtw (as) / have been. &r. Ike. Inanimate. — {De/i'n.) I'uk Ahy-6^ it is. I-ak-woM' (def. time) Ahy-og-uah (def. time) tkeij are. Ai-rtk-i/: (iiulef. time) Ay-6g-//- (iiidef. time) (hei/ are. Ke U\k Ke l-iik-n'Dw l-ii-mn^dk I-ii-magak-tr COMI'. OF IMIRS. Ke ahy-o/» Ke ahy-og-iiY/A it has been. thet/ have beer.. Inde/iniic. {Contin. ht/irr.) Ahy-iih-nmhirdhk It is. Ahy-i'ih->nahgahk-fM Thci/ are. This (Definite) tense is made, in its xcveral persons. Indefinite or independent «)f Time, by the Flap or " alterec" vowel j in other words, by changing the Initial / (which in this case consti- tutes the entire Root, p. 1 H2) into c, or the diphthong ai, as exem- plified above (p. 201) in the third person plural. It may be proper here to remind the reader that the Flat vowel (p. 73. et seq.) is formed by changing the Jirsl vowel of the verb, be it initial or otherwise, into a longer vocal element viz. a long vowel or a di])hthong, as /, or e, or ci, or //, into c = a in fate ; a into c(i, o into ed, -oo into cdo = u, oo (initial) into tve- ; &c. the speaker laying a suitable stress on the lengthened (first) syllable. Reserving for another place the Exemplification of its important uses in Speech, as distinguishing the Indekimtk from the Defi- nite, I shall, in addition to what has already been said respecting it, only observe here as follows : First — Of tile above two Attributive (verbal) forms, the Deriva- tive or rt/i a predicative form — in its Definite or Accidental meaning; as, " he is, was, &c. good ;" " he lives, lived, &c." This mode, only, of the verb is formed through the Moods and Tenses. PRKTERITE."' The Preterite of //*/,v mood, also, is formed by adding to its Present tense the element -pun, with generally a connecting vowel. (See Aildeiidu.) FUTURK. This tense is expressed by changing the Future Indicative sign, ya, " shall or will," into ye or ke, and placinj^ it, in like manner, before the Present (subj.), as Tan ittii ke i-n-y luii' What place (Where) shall he-thoui* But with a special reference to Time, the following form is used ; when the same particle becomes as in other cases, the sign of the Compound tense, viz. "have." (See pres. subj. p. 201.) Ahy-ah-_yoM-in When / shall be. l-h-yiin-e l-{i-yuii-e Ahy-ah-y«H-in I-a-/c/«-e Ahy-ddJ-'m l-i\-yak-e A'hy-ah-yo'«g--in I-a-y«A--oo A'hy-ah-i/iing-oon \-a-ydik-oo A'hy-ah-i/dig-oou V-Rt-wdvi-e A'hy-ahu;od/-in The " altered" first vowel, when used in this form, is equivalent to the English Indif. element -ever, as when-<'yc/-, ike. See Syntax. thou shalt be. he shall be. we (1.3) shall be. we (1.2) shall be. ye shall be. Ihet/ shall be. Com I'. OK FuT. Ke I-ii-y(m-e When / shall have been. &c. "* xi. '21. Ke'shpin oomah lihyahyah-burt . . if here t/iou wert, " hadst been." xi. M. Che 6onesheshey«'H(/-oobun . . that we (1.2) should be good, w. 19. Ki'-iliniii ti'l»rtiii(l!'i!ijfo<»/(7/"»V/ nopun, . if yp were governed 204 A (iKVMMAIl nV ImI'EIIATIVB."" 'I'Ijc linpfrativc Mood hiin /iro U'liHeH, the PrfHcntimd the Indrkinitk. 'I'liu third pcTMOiiH of hotli toiiHeH arc uhke, being the huiuc uh the third (lerHoiiH of tlie Kut. Iiidic. Present on Dkfimte. Ud Ahy-ahw, or -t'»/i Be IhoH. Kata \-ntv tah Aliy-ali Let him hv. Ui.lAk A\\y-a\\-iliih Lot «.v (1.52) be Uh-k Ahy-a-^ (»r -tii/oof; »i. 1,,: Km Ui-H'uk tah Ahy-ah-«'»//|f Inanimatk. I -ft Ifiem he. KiiUi I'dtv tah Ahy-i'ih Let il be. Katil I-ow-rf tah Ahy-ah-iJ'MM I .ct Ihctn be. ' Indekinite. The Indeiinite (future) tense of this mood is formed of the dement 'kun, of which A; is the " eonstant" Sign. I-a-k-uii KiltJl If/w I-a-k-rU- Ui-k.dik K&tA 1-dxv Ahy-ah-kun tah Ahy-ah Ahy-ah-krtA Ahy-i'ih-krVAr tah Aljy-ah-«'w^ Be I /urn. Let him be. Let f/.v (l.y) be. Be tfc. Let them be. To the above I'ohitivk form of the Simple Verb we shall now add the suiM'osiTivE, the nouuTKiJL or Hypothetical, and the (Chippeway) NEUATivE, forms. K I "6 iv. 31. Weaeni-n . . eat thou. vii. 3. viii. 11. Mahj-an . . depart thou. vii. 3. XX. 17. £zh-6n . . go thou. xiv. 31. Mahjah-rfn'A. . let us (1.2.) depart xxi 12. P^-wesen-iA- . . hither-eat-ye, " come and line." xiv. 31. Pahzegwc'e-A; . . arise-yp (from sitting pot-rure). XV. 4. 9. Ahy-ah-yooA- . . be-ye, xvi. 33. Oqjap-aindahmoo-yooA- (reflect.). • cbeerful-thinkyp. THK CUKK ( ANilUAUR. 2()r) INITK. e third cmcnt pAnAfinAPii IV. RUPPOSITIVF..'" Tln' above Simple form of the verl) is HU!tceptil)lo of the circum- Ntuious of HitiM'oHiTioN Hiul noiniT ', tht' foHiior is indicuted by the luhh'd clomoiit v-f'ookt' (Cl)ip. A-dtxtg) (piiisi, " I suppose." It is used in the Indicative only, as follows, Note. — From the j^reat caution whicli the Indian obsurveH in narrating I'VcntH, ike. of which hv has uut a per-sttnat knowlcdKi'. t!u;He hiui-I'ohiti VR forms are of very fre(|uent occurrence in discourse. Net' I'-an-et'ooke M«f/ ahy-ahn-ah-doog /am, Isu|)po.se. Kef I'-an-et'ook(' Kcil ahy-ahn-ah-doog Ihoii art. I'-ii-t'ooke ahy-ah-doogain he is. Net' I'-rtn-«rt»-et'ookc M/jf/ aliy-ah-rwi/i-.'idoog we (I.,'}) are. Ket' I'-an-^hjow-et'ooke A'cr/ ahy-ah-mm-adoog we (1.2) are. Kcl' I'-an-owow-et'ooke Ked ahy-4h-w-adoog ye are. I'-ii-tooke-ni^ ai y-ah-doog-u»tg thet/ are- d the way) I-a-t'iokt^ I-{i-tooke-«<' INANIMATE. Ahy-ah-doogain Ahy-ah-doogain-M« it is I suppose. they are I suppose. The preterite of this mood, instead of e-t'ookd takes a-^oo-pun (.Sd pers. -Awj-pi'in). See Addenda. Pahaoraph V. The latter of the circumstances alluded to above, namely. Doubt, (in the mind of the speaker,) is expressed in the Subjunctive, where only it may be said to have a grammatical form, by the inserted " constant" element, w, and a final g:,iV'j c, as follows. "7 xi. 39. Nebahzoo-mdhgooz^-rfoo^r . . he death-like-8melleth-J-*M/)pose. 206 A GRAMMAR OF Subjunctive — l*re.seiit, Animate.'"* I-a-w-«n-t' I-a-wwM-c I-Ak-we I-a-wdk-wi' I-a.-^vSk-^^'v 1-ii-wdig-wv I-a-WflA-wo ahy-4h-w-25 viii. 11. Mahje-ezhechega-Aaitt . . evil-do-^JoM no^ xii. 15. Sageze-Aain . . fear thou not. vi. 20. Zageze-kdgoon . . fear ye not. iii. 7. Mahmahkahd-aindah-^atH. . wonder-think, " marvel," no^/Aou.' V. 28. Mahmahkahd-aindah-jFojjrooH . . wonder-think, " marvel," not ye I THE CREK LANGUAGE. 209 The Negative is, in like manner with the Positive Verb, suscop- til)le of the 8ii])positive and Donbtt'ul forms (p. 2(),>), thus, SiJpposiTivE. (Indie.) Nind ahy-iih-se-doog, &c..../ am not, I suppose. &c. DouBTFUi,. (Subj.) Ahy-iih-se-\v-«//-i'ii)i, &e....(If) / be not. &c. Note. — It may be proper to rep it here that in certain foriiiN of Expression, the Verb-Substantivo is, .i respects European (Jonstruction, dropped. See pp. 137, ir)6, Nuiv )54, and Syntax. It shouhl be borne in mind, that tlie Intransitive Verb, generally, is susceptible of the Augment, and Dimin. forms ; which also take, in like manner, the several modifying Accessories noticed above. (See p. 69 et seq.) Thus far then of the Intransitive Verb in its absolute significa- tion, positively and negatively ; we shall now proceed to consider it in its Relative form, or in connexion with an Accessory gram- matical THIRD person in an Ohliijite Relation. Paracjhaph \'II. ArcEssoRY Case (p. I'^.'i et seq.).''^'' The use of tiiis anomalous, and therefore to the European learner very embarrassing form, will be fully explained hereafter. See Syntaa: Indicative — Present, Animate. Net' V-a-iv-(iii Kef I'-a-w-an li\-thii Net' I'-a-wan-?J«/( Kef r-a-wan-«wo/i' Kef I'-n-v/im-owow I'-a-thu-d Nind ahy-ah-zj'-ow Kcd ahy-ah-w-o« Ahv-ah-w-MM / am, in relation to him, or them. thou art. he is. Nind ahy-ah-won-«oH we (I..S) are. Ked ahy-ah-won-«oH we (1.2) are. Ked ahy-ah-won-t'niff'A ye are. Ahy-ah-j/'«H they are. ""• See AWp.v (ir and ()8. 210 A (iUAMMAU OK i> Indeterminate. {l-{\-netvoo, &.C. (p. 200) Ahy-^li-7/< /Amagun-c//iiX Ahy-^h-mahgud-entg (If) it is, in relation to him, &c. The above Accessory Case, in common with every mode of the (Chippeway) Verb, is susceptible of Negation, and also of its Suppositive and Doubtful forms — the Negative sign, .ve or se-n always retaining its place (p. 206), as, '27 vii. 38. Tah oonj-^jewun-^etoMn . . they shall from-flow in relat. t^c. "8 x\. 55. A'hyekagah ahyahmahgfid-ent$r-6opun (pret.). . almost it was he'\ng-to-them, " was nigh at hand." (p. 124 Notes.) rHE t'RKK LANGUAGE. 211 ' Indicative. Nind aliy-iih-sK-w-f/w (p. .209).../ am not, in relat. to him, &c. &c. Inanimate. (Def.) Ahy.ali-sen-f«<7j ..// is not, in relat. to him, &c.'*'' Indefinite. Aliy-iih-uiahgAh-sen-ew^A...// is not, ir/.'-'" Subjunctive, (p. 210.) Ahy-iili-9e-w?/g...(If) / am not, in relat. to him, &c. &c. Inanimate. (Def.) Ahy-iih-sen-e«ig...(If) it is not, id. Indefinite. Ahy-Jih-mahg4h-sen-e;iig...(If) it is not, id. SupposiTivE. (Indie.) p. 205. Nind ahy-iih-se-w)on-Ahdoog.../ am not, in relat. to him, &c. I sup- &c. pose. Doubtful, (Subj.) Ahy-i'ih-se-w«g-w-ain...(If) / be not, id. Sect. II. The Transitive Verb comprises, besides the Subject and Attribute (as in the Intransitive form), the Object and the End (p. 77). The Transitive Verb may be divided (p. 35) into two parts — the Root and Affix. The Affix itself (of the derived Transitive) may also be divided into two parts (p. 37), namely, the Characteristic '29 MX. 36. Tah book-oogahn-acgahdii-im-en/A (part. pass. inan). . it (a bone) shall break-boned-be-no<-» (hil cn-ane-ni-o«, He thinks /hw».] or -mil. 'i.Inan. It-Ptho-.'-?/M/ Ood en-ain-d-OH Ife thinks it (p]). 41. and ()4). '2 iNnEKiNiTE Object, &c. (pp. })<) ct seq. 10<). 110.). Anini. Sake-h-ew-i'iyoo Sahge-h-ew-a lie loves. Inan. -(t)cli-egiiyoo -(t)ch-eg-i'i he loves. (See p. 104 Note.) :i. Partkipiai. Passive (p. 1 1 1 et seq.). Aniiu. Siikc-(t)ch-cg-i\soo Sahge-(t)ch-eg-ah/oo. he is loved, (l.at. aniatus est.) Inan. S!ike-(t)ch-eg-atayoo Sahge-(t)ch-eg-ahdii. it is loved. (L.at. aniatum est.) 4 Verbal Adjective (p. 114), Active. Indet. Sake-h-ewiiy-w'J.v-M Sahge-h-ewii-wJz-cA. ht is loving, affectionfl/r. Indef. Si'ike-(t)ch-egay-w;.v-M Sahge-(t)ch-ega-fi'j;:-e/i. he is loving, afl'ectionate. TIM': (RKK LANOUAdK. Pinsivc. (pp. I 1 i. 1 ir,.) 1. Aiiiiri. Si'.k(.-l.-ik-(.,.s..i Sahge.h-ig-(.o/.-fh. lie is (iiiiiy l)f) lovtv/, is nm'iuhk. Inaii. S,,kt.-li.ik-vvuu Saligf-h-ig-Avut. it may hv \med, in \it\-nble. y. Anim. It-othe-t-ak-oos-.i EM-run-tl-!ih«o()-/el.. Iif is (may \w) so-tlioiight, coiisidi-red. loan. rt-ctliL'-t-;\k-wmi En-riin-d-iilig-wut. it is (may he) so-thought, (leemc-d. I'AIIAaUAIMl II. Inuu ATivK Mood. (p. ,-,| et siuj. and Noicn.) I'resent. J^ihect. ."Jd. i)ers. Accus. 213 Ne siike-h-ow Ke sake-h-ow Sake h-ayoo Nc sakc-h-a-««'M Kc sake-h-a«wM' Ke sakc-h-oMyort' Sake-h-ay;<>«/' Ne Si'ike-h-6w-uk Ke siike-h-(')w-uk Sdke-li-iiyoo Ne siike-h-a-nun-tik Ke sake-h-aiunv-uk Ke siike-h-owow-iik Stike-h-i'iyw-uk Nf sake-h-u or -liti Nin sahge-h-aii / love him. Ke sahge-h-ali thou lovest him. O».sahge-h-aun,or-on Ac loves him. Nin sahge-h-ah.«J« -wc (l..'J) love him. Ke sahge-h-ah-«o// Ke sahgc-h-ah-W(//i Oo s;'ihge-h-ah-wv/« I'lural. Nil! sahge-h-og Ke sahge-h-og Ne Eh si^kc-l I on- WC (l.iij love him. i/e love him. ihey love him. I love tlicm. thou lovest them. Oo sahge-h-rt«//, or -on he loves them. Nil! sahge-h-ah-noii-ig we ( 1 .,'}) love them. Ke sahge-h-ah-n')n-ig we (1.2) love them. Ke sahgc .h-ah-w<)-g yc love them. Oo sahge-h-ah-won they love them. I'ltETKHriK, Niii siihgc-h-ahbim J loveJ him. ^*^- See Addenda Ki-iTRE. (See Pits. Tense.) y>! knh -^alige-h-ali I sluill, \t ln,r hiiii &e. 214 A (JUAMMVU Ol Nnti'. — 'I'lu- hitiire sign yii (Chip, kali), iist'd lu'liiic llic Cnst iiiiil NfCdiid perHoiiH, is (-liangeil into kufltnya-la), ('liip. tali, l»cl'oic the tliird iicrMon, Hirigiihir and phirnl. IndettM-iiiiiiatc- i>i\kc-\x-i\l\-f(uii-iwo<:,../ie, ortficif, Utvcluiii, or llicm. {Vv. mi laiiiu'). Invkrhk. ,1(1 pors. S'omin. (p.,)!. ct si'(|.) AV sAki'-h-ik Nin s/ilige-li-ig AV sake-h-ik S/ike-h-ik Nf si'iko-h-ik-o(v/ri» Ke 8!ike-h-ik-ooHrtw Ke sake-h-lk-ooH'o'f?) Siike-h-ik-WM^- Ne skke-h-ik-wuk Ke s&ke-h-ik-wuk Stike-li-ik Ke sahge-li-ig ()o sahgo-h-igooM nil- h)vt'tli-lie, i.e. he hiveth me, mill HI) of (lie rest.) he lovotli t/ur. he is loved liy him, hrr, iir tlipm, imr.). iV»'« ,sahge-h-ig-o«)«(»'« he loveth m.v (1.3). Ac »iihge-h-ig-ooMo« he loveth «.v(l.y). Ke .sahge-h-ig-oou'n// lie loveth you. Oo siiligc-h-ig-oorvon they are loved (liy hini, her, or them, dkf.). Plural. Nin sahge-h-ig-oog they love me. Ke si'ihge-h-ig-oog they love thee Oo sahge-h-ig-oon he is loved. Ne s&ke-h-ik-oonaii-uk Ne s(ihge-h-ig-oonon-ig they love (1.3) us. Ke s&ke-h-ik-oonow-uk Ke 8dhge-h-ig-oon6n-ig they love (1.2) us. Ke s&ke-h-ik-oowow-uk Ke sAhge-h-ig-oowo-g they love you. Siike-h-ik-wuck Oo sAhge-h-ig-oow6ii they are loved. Note. — Some Verbs ending in -w-ayoo (p. 45), and -sw-ayoo (Special, p. 87), and others ending in -ska-wayoo (Special, p 87), -td-wayoo (particul. p. 96) change tit (3rd pers.) — the former into ook — the latter, with some others, into hk, or fik (p. 107). Direct. ("2d and 1st pers.) Ke sake-h-in Ke sahgeh Ke s^ke-h-in-niin Ke sahge-h- Ke 8&ke-h-in-ow6w Ke siihge-h-ini Ke siihge-h-im-in Invkrse. Ke sahge-h-in thou lovest me. thou love8tus( 1.3) ye love me. ye love us (1.3). Ke sake-h-ittin thee love- 1, ie 1 love thee and so ot the rest). I'lIK ( KKK LANUUAOK. 215 Ke 8iikc-li-ittin-ow6\v Kc .si'ib 8iikc-h.iuin-iiiiiii" we (l..*0 love thee. J'nKTKniTE. NcHi'ikf-li Ik-oo, or-o(»ti Niii .s(ilig(-li-if;r.,Mil)un inc> loved he, i.e. ^f. lie loved me. FlITtlHK. (p. 201 ) Nr gii Hiiku h ik Ne ktih Muhge-h-ig inewill love-he.i.e. "'■■ he will love nie. Sijn.M»N( rivE Mooi) I'roHeiit DiiiEcr. In this M(»o(l Horn Pronouns (Nomin. and Actus.) arc expressed l)y the Jnjk'vtion. Si'digc-h-ug (that) I love him. -lid thou lovest hitn. -od he loves him. -ung-id,or-6ed we (1.3) love him. -I'mg we (1.2) love him. -Aig ye love him. -ah-w»'id they love him. .Sake-h-uk -at -at -uk-(5et -ilk -liig -at-W(')w (def.) S-e-fikc-h-iitch-ik (ind.) S-ahy-{ihge-6dj-ig they love him.'^"" '^' See p. r>2 et seq. Notes .'«), 31, :«2. '•'" xiv. .'Jl . Si'ihge-wy. . (that; / love him. xiii. 20. Anoon-ahg(Hg)-in . . him (indef.) / send, iv. 14. Ka m6n-ny . . I give (it to) him. vii. 23. Ke. . ndojeinoo-w^f . . that / have saved, cured, him. X. 15. Azhe kekanemHi; . . so / know him. ix. 36. Che tapway-ane-m-aA(/(M(jf)-ebun (pret.) . . that / rniglit true- think him. xi. 3. Sa/ij/ahge-ud (flat vowel). . whom thou lovest him. xviii. 20. Wejew-uf/. . as thou accompaniedst him. iii. 26. Kah debahjc-ni-Mrf . . whom thou narratest him. XX. 15. VVaindin Aindahw-dnemuc/ .» . . whom seekest thou.' ix. 17. A'hn'een. . andhje-m-e/d? . . what manner, how, relate8t-//(o«- him ? xvii. 2. Kah me'n-nA;(Mr/;)tn . which thni givest him. xvn. 3. Kah p(^-ahuoon «f/ (whom) thou hither-sendc'-l hxm. 2 Hi A (i HAM MM! or Si'ikf-l>-iik-\v<>\\ -Ut-W('»W -ttt IMuiMl. Siiligf-li-u^-wi'ili (iliiit) I love tlii'in. -lul-wiili tlioii l(>v»".t tlicm. -(«! he loves liini, or tlu'iii. xix. .JK. K(i().s-(;(/ . . as //(' fi'iws /lim kit thciin. x\ii. 2. die nu'ii-f/(/ . . tluil he give lo /lim (or tlu'in). xi. ;i(i. l''ii;tli. . azho .sali^e-or/ . . lieholil I . as In- loved liim. \i. .')2. ('Ill' niali\vunje(,h)r/(/ . . that /if " jjiatlier togetlu'r" tlicin. ix. It. Ki' \vi\\\hc(/i)<1if (calls.). . that he miiilc hint sei-. V. Ahpi' kali vviililmmmof/ . . wlipn that hv saw him. Kiya ke kektiine-in-o*/. . and that he knew him. xviii. 'iCi. Kah k('shkc-tahwnhge-)w (def. ) -nh-wi'id they love them. Sc!ikc-h-i'itfh-ik(iii(lef. ) Sahyahge-li-i'xij-ig they h>ve (him or) them. Ill the " flat vowel" or, as respeets 'I'imb, Indvfinilc form, the plur. endiiii? -wow (Chip, •wiili), in chanj^ed — in the first perH. jilur. (1.2), and the Becond pern. plur. into -ooit; — in the other persons, plural, into -ik (see e.(^. the third perw. plur. and p. 218, where it is exemplified throughout.) Indeterminate. Sahge-h-oiig (tiiat) he or fhey love him, iNVF.nSF..'" Suhge-h-id (that) he loves me. -ik he loves thee, -eg-ood he is loved. Sake-ii -iih- gun- ewik Sake-h -it -isk -tk' ■oot vi. 2. Kah /. . who Jhey) see him. vi. 4.'). Kah n6on(lahw-r//y'-/9 . . who have heard him. v. 38. Kah i'ihuoon«7( ("'(/)'« whom he hath sent him. vi. 29. Kah ahnoonrt7//('^f/;)j« . (inaii.) whom Ap hfith sent (them.) vii. 2.5. Wah ne's-ahw«7i;(of//)(« . . whom they want (to) kill. I ' ' IV. :14. xii. 44. 45. Kah ahnoozh-*d . . he (who) sent me. V. .Vi. Owh tahahjemtii . . he who narrates me. V. 3. Ewh anahjemif/ . . that (which) he relates (of) me. \. \ti. Xv.hv keki'inem/i/ . . as he knoweth me. X. 17. Wainjp sahfre/rf . therefore hr loves mr. \. 18. Kali mvonzhifi . wliicli hr fjavr mr. 2\H A GKAMMAU Oh Silkv-h-^aniect SCthge- h-^aniingid or -<;ungid he loves lis (1 .S). .ittAk -enrog he loven us (1'2). -itt&ig -en/iig he luvcs you. -Tk'oot-w6w -dgood-wiih they are loved. Plural. (Indefinite ; or " Flat V« jwel.") Seiike-h-itch-ik Sahyahgc •-h-idj-ig* (that) they love me. -isk-ik -ik-ig they love thee. -ikoo(t)ch-ik -dgoo(d)j-ig they are loved -^amcetch-ik -damingidj-ig they love us (I.'l). -ittuk-ook -enung-ook they love us (l.'i). •ittiiig'Ook -enaig-ook they love you. -ikoo(tjch-ik -egoo(d)j-ik they are loved (by him or them, i»kk.) • Sahge. h-ewod, UEK. vii. 20. W&nain babah-undah-n^s^'A . . who about-go-that he kill thee. ix. 37. Me owh kanoon-^A;. . it is he (Ital. Ecco 16) who talketh (to) thee. i. 48. Chepwah und6o-in-<'t . . before he called thee. ix. 21. Ahn'een kah A6oA-6ok?. . what manner, how, did he (to) thee. xix. 11. Kah bdhkedd-n-ahm(um).(?oA; . . who {he) has delivered (it) to thee. xvii. 3. Che kekane-m-e^ucfA (= -ik'wdh). . that they know thee. i. 31. Che kekdnem-ei/oocf . . that he should be known by him. iii. 2. Wejewegood . . if he be accompanied by him. vii. 1. Che nesegood . . that he be killed by him, or them. vii. 51 . Cht'pwah nbond-dhgood. .before he is heard by it (viz the law) . xviii. 3. Ke laenegood . , he had been given (to) by them. X. 4. Noopenahne^ootf , . heia followed by him (or them). iv. 12. Kah m6ez)\-^yahmingtd . . he who gave (it to) «.« (1. 3) vi. 52. Che ahshahm-enun^ . . that he feed us (1.2). viii. 36. Pahgeden-enat^ . . if Ae release you. xiv. 16. Che menenaiy that he give (to) you. xiv. 16 Che wejewendig . . that he accompany you. xiii. 14. Kiya kdkenoo-ahmoo-nai^ (flat vow.) . . he who teacheth you, xvii. 20. Ka tapwa-auem-e;(ic(/)i^ . . who (.they) shall true-think me. xviii. 21 . Egewh kah n6ondahw-(?/(in[;)-ty. . those (they) who heard mr V. 36, n, .50. Kah mrezh-p/dW;)-;;) (iiian.V . which fif hath givrn »ip. Siikf-h-eim ■ekk -ei'iig lilU CKKU LANCil'.\(iK. I)mE(T.'^» (2(1 Hiul Istpcrs.) 210 SAIige-h-eyiii) (that) thuu lovcst ni| thou Invest iw (l..'0 -t'V<»lig -(•yiup ye love me. XV. 18. Ke H\\eenn-{\nem-ewiid . they hated me. viij. 10. E'gewh kn&hme-m-ik-ik (flat vow.) . . those (they) who ac- cuse thee, " thine accusers." vi, 45. Kiya kah kekenooahma%ooc(;'-if/ . . and who {they) are taught by him. vii. 18. Kah dhnoon- e1/00(^'-tn . . whom he was sent by f'<>m). X. 35. Kah 6odea-^goodjiy . . who (they) were arrived at by it. i. 22. Kah be-(ihnoozh-^yaAmtn^(y(i((;)-iA; . . . Mey who hither- sent M»(1.3). XV. 18. 19. Keshpin aheeng-&neme«ai(/-«;aA . . if they hate you. xiii. 35. Ka, . kekanem-enay-wt^A . . they shall know you. xviii. 28. Che wdne-sk-dhk-oowt^d . . that they be defiled by it. >'*'* XX. 29. Ke wuhbahm-eyun . . thou hast seen me. xvii. 6. 9. 12. Kah m<;enzh-^aA»-(UN)-i(7. . whom (plur.) thou hast given me. xvii. 7. Kah meenzh-eyo/in(wM)-in. . which (plur.) thou hast given ine. xvii. 4. Kah meenzh-^un . . which thou gavest (to) me. xi. 41. 42. Ke noondahw-e^/un . . (that) thou hast heard me. xi. 42. Ke ahnoozh-^^un . . (that) thou hast sent me. xvii. 23. 26. Kah . . sahge-^itn . . thou hast loved me. i, 48. A'hn'ahpe kakanem-e^Mtt.i' (flat vow.). . what time know-^Aow tne f X. 24. Ka gwenahw-dindahmoo-t^rfH^f (caus.) . . . thou lack-think, " doubt," makest us (1.3). vii. 19. Wagoonain . . neah-eydiy . . why . . ye kill me. viii. 19. :dv. 7. Keshpin kek&nemeyaj//-oopun (pret.). . if y*? knew me. xvi. 27- Ke sahge-eyai^ . . as ye love me. iv. 26. Neen kanoon-enoM . . / who speak (to) thee. xxi. 15, 16. Sahge-enrfn . . that /love thee. ii. 4. Ka tootoon-enoH . . shall 1 do (to) thee. xiii, 12. l.T, Kah tootoon—iiahgnnk . . what I have done to you. 220 A GRAMMA U OK Siihke-h-ittiin -ittuk-wovv -ittiik Inverse. Siihge-h-enoii (that) I love thee, -h-eniig-wah ' I love you. -h-enong we love tliee. Imperative Mood, Present. (See p. 204. )'^'' Sdke-h Si'ihge-h love thou hitn. KuttS sake-h-ayoo Oo tah sdhke-h-flMw, or -on let him love him Siike-h-a-tak Sahge-h-ah-diih let us love liini. SAke-h-eek Siihge-h-6eg love ye him. Kutta s^ike-h-iiy-v\uk Oo tah sdhge-h-ah-wiiii let them love him. Siike-h-ik Kutta siike-h-ayoo Plural. Slihge-h Oo tah siihge-h-aun love thou them, let him love (him or) them. xiii. 34. XV. 9. Kah ezhe sahge-^n«* xxi. 19. 22. NoopenahzhesAiw . . follow thou me. iv. 7- Mena-h-esAm . . give thou me drink, vi. 34. Meemh-^shin-om . . give thou (to) us (1.3). 222 A GRAMMAR OF Ne s&ke-t-an Ke s&ke-t-an S&ke-t-ow Ne sake-t-an-n&n Ke s&ke-t-an-anow Ke 8ake-t-an-ow6w SAke-t-6w-uk Indicative Mood. Ne sdhge-t-oon Ke s&hge-toon Oo sAhge-t-oon Ne sahge-t-oon-non Ke sahge-t-oon-n6n Ke s^hge-t-6on-ahw4h ye love it. Oo sahge-t-6on-ahwah they love it. I love it. thou lovest it. he loves it. we (1.3) love it. we (1.2) love in. Net' It-ethe-t-en Kef It-^the-t-en It-4the-t-um Net' It-6the-t-eii-nan I so-think it. thou thinkest it. he thinks it. we (1.3) think it. we (1.2) think it. Nind en-din-d-on Ked en-din-d-on Ood en-4in-d-on Nind en-din-don-non Ket' It-6the-t-en-anow Ked en-din-don-non Ket' It-^the-t-en-owow Ked en-din-don-ahwdh ye think it. It-^the-t-tim-wuk Ood en-din-don-ahwdh they think it. * This n is expletive, being simply the cognate liquid of the d follow- ing it. See Introduction. Indeterminate. 1. Skke-t-a-newoo ..he, or they, (Fr. on) love it. 2. It-ethe-t-ahgun-ewoo...Ae or they so-think it. Double Inanimate. Sake-t-a-mahgun it loves it. Ne sake-h-ik-oon Inverse. Nin jahge-h-6goon Ke sdke-h-ik-oon Sdke-h-ikoo me loveth it, i.e. it loves me. it loves thee, he is loved (by it). Ke sahge-h-egoon Oo sahge-h-^goon Ne sdke-h-ik-oon-non Nin sahge-h-egoon-non it loves us (1.3) Ke sake-h-ik-oon-anow Ke sahge-h-^goon-non it loves us (1.2) Ke sdke-h-ik-oon-ow6w Ke sahge-h-dgoon-ahwah it loves you. Sdke-h-ikoo-wiik Oo sahge-h-6goo-wug the)' are loved. Double Inanimate. .S^ke-h-ik-6o-mahpun...it is lovod by it- THt: CREE LANGUAGE. 223 It. in. It. c it. I it. \o\v- i.e. it). Sake-t-mn -lun -at -ihk .lak -iaig -at-w6w (def.) Subjunctive Mood Direct.'^" Sahge-t-ooy6n (that) I love it. -(Soyun -ood -ooyrtng -ooyung -ooydig -oow6d thou lovest it. he loves it. we (1.3) love it. we (1.2) love it. ye love it. they love it. they love it. Sedke-t-^tch-ik (indef.) Sahyahge-t-6odj-ik En-aind-uinm(}n (that) / so think it. See Inirans. pp. 195. 196. 197- Conjug. 6. Indeterminate. Sahge-t-ang (that) he or they love it. It-ethe-t-ummrt« &c. I . Siike-t-anewik 9 Tt.^the-t-dhgun-ewik £n-ain-d-ong Sake-t-ii-magftk he or they so-tliink or esteem it. Double Inanimate. Sahge-t-dh-mag&k (that) it loves it. >3/' iv. 34. Che gezhe-t-ooyt^n . . (and) that / finish it. X, 25. Wazhe-too-yrfAnCdn) -in . . (which) / do them. xiii. 2. Ke aht-ooc/ . . he had put it. v. 19. Ke bahn&hje-t-ood . . he had defiled it. xix. 39- Ke bed-ood . . (and) he brought it. xix. 10. A'hy-ahmd?i. . (that) / have it. xviii. 37. Che w^en-d-ahmrfn. . that / tell, declare it. xiii. 26. Ke gwahbah-ahm(um)-(^n . . (when) / have dipped it. v. 30. Anaind-ahm-rfn . . as / think, intend, " my will." X. 17- Pahged^-n-ahmdn . . as 7 lay-down it. X. 18. Che ooddhpe-n-ahmd'n ■ . that /take it. xvi. 30. Kekaind-dhmuR . . (that) tkou knowest (t^ or them). i. 50. Wainje t&pway-&ind-ahmun .^ .. whence true-thinkest, " be- lievest," thou it ? iv. 11, A'hn'eende . . w&inde-n-&hmun ? . . .what-place . . from-takest thou it ? XX. i. 5. G. Ke wkhbundunfjF . . (and) he saw it (or them). xiii. 26. Kah gwdhbah-uny . . (when) he had dipped it. viii. 9. E'gewh kah noonA-dhg-ig , . those who {they) heard i7, 224 Si\ke-h-ik-oo-yiin A GUAM MAR OF I NVERSE. Sahge-h-egoo-y6n that it loves me. -oo-yun -egoo-yun It loves thee. -oo-t -6goo-d he is loved (by it) -oo-ykk -egoo-yoiig it loves iis(l..S). -oo-yak -egoo-yung it loves us (1.2). -oo-yaig -egoo-yaig it loves you. -oo-t-wow -egoo-d-wah they are loved. Siike-h-ik-oomagak Double Inanimate. Sahge-ig-oomagiik (that) it is loved by it. viii. .'Jl. Keshpin. . minje'mi-n-Mw^r . Ai . . he hold it. viii. 29. Manw-aind-wM^-Jn (plur.). . which he well-thinks, aj)proveB. vii. 23. Keshpin. . ootahpe-n-wnj . .if he take it. iii. 31. Ahkeh aindahzhind»«M<7 . . earth, he relates, " speaks of," it. iii. 11, Kakkindahmonjf . . (which) we (1.3) know {it). Kah wahbundahmon^ . . which we have seen {it). i. 14. Ke wdhbundahmttftjr . . (and) we saw it. xiii. 29. Ka ahyah-ra-M«.9-oon (plur.j .. (which) we (1.2) shall have {them). XV. 10. Keshpin minjeme-n-ahm-«% . .ii ye hold them. xiii. 17. Keshpin kekaindahm-f% . .'\i ye know them. xvi. 4. Che mef(u-aindahm-«jjr. . that ye may lind-think, recollect it. vi. 26. Ke wahbundahm-flj^r . . that ye had seen them. i. 38. W%oonain aindahw-aindum-ni// .'^ . . what seek ye .> ix. 27. Wah . . n6ndahm-a% ;'' . . (that) ye want (to) hear (7. vi. 14. 22. Ahpe kah wahbundahm-ooiwot/ . . when they had seen it. vi. 13. Kah esqiiand-ahm-ooworf .. which Mey had left, "remained over." V. 28. Che noond-ahm-oowf/t/ . . they will hear it. xi. 41. Ke t'koo-n-ahm-oou)0(Z . . they withdrew it. xviii. 28. K6o-t-ahm-ooH)f/f/ . . as they feared it. vi. 23. Kah . . m(j-ei(0(/ . , they eat it. K ' I THE CREE LANGUAGE. 225 it). I. )• Mt. Sdke-t-ah Sdke-t-ah-t&k Sdke-t-ak It-ethe-ta It-^the-ta-t&k Imperative Mood, Present. S4hge-t-oon'3* Sdhge-t-oon-d&h Siihge-t-uog En-&in-d-un En-liin-dun*dih love thou it. let us love it. love ye it. think thou it. let us think it. It-6the-t-um*6ok £n-din-d-um-6ok think ye it. Indefinite. 1 Sdke-t-a-kun -kak -kaik 2 It-ethe-t-um-6o-kun •kak love thou it. let us love it. love ye it. think thou it. let us (1.2) think it. -kdik think ye it. veB. live it. Paragraph IV. Indeterminate, &c. Object. Anim. obj. Inan. obj. Sake-h-ewdyoo Sdke-che-giiyoo S^hge-h-ewA Sahge-ch-egd he loves, (p. 99) he loves, (p. 101) Indic. Pres. Direct. (Conjug. 3.) Ne sslke-h-evvjin Nin sahge-h-ew& I love (somebody) Ke siike-h-ewiin Ke sahge-h-ewa thou lovest (id.). SAke-h-ewayoo Sdhge-h-ewa he loves (id.). >38 xii. 28. P<<8heg-ainduhgoo-t-(fott . . one-think, " glorify," thou it. xiii. 29. Keshpenah-d-cCon . . buy thou {it or) them. ii. 19. Bahnahje-t-rfo5' . . destroy ye it. xi. 34. XX. 27. Wahbu-nd-u» . . see thou (it or) them. xviii. 11. Peena-h-«rt . . enter, " put up," thou it. V. 8. 11. Ootahpe-n-un . . take thou it. ii. 8. Zege-n-dhm-ook . . pourytf it. V. 39. Undah-kekai-nd-aAm-tfoA . . go-know ye (it or) them. xi. 39. Wkoo-ri'dhm-ook . . withdraw, " take away," ye it. xiv. 15. Minjtme-n-ahm-ook . . hold, " keep," ye (it or) them, Q 226 A GRAMMAR OF 1 Ne siike-h-ewdn-nan Nil! sahge-h-ewa-min we (!..')) love (id.). [ Ke si'ike-h-ewiin-iinow Ke sahge-h-ewA-min we (1.2) love (id.). Ke sake-h-ewdn-owow Ke sdhge-h-ewd-m ye love (id.). Sdke-h-ewdy-wuk Sahge-h-ewd-wug they love (id.). ' Inverse. Ne s4ke-h-ik-6win Nin sdhge-h-ig-oo me love they(indet.)- Ke sdke-h-ik-6win Ke sAhge-h-ig-6o they love thee. Siike-h-uw Sdhge-h-dh he is loved Ne sdke-h-ik-6win-nan Nin sAhge-h-ig-oo-min they love us (1.3). Kesike-h-ik-owin-iinow Ke sahge-h-ig-6o-min they love us (1.2). Ke sake-h-ik-6win-o\v6w Ke sahge-h-ig-6o-m they love you. Siike-h-ow-uk Siihge-h-dh-wug they are loved Subjunctive Mood, Direci SAke-h-ew-eiin Sahge-h-ew-4yon (that) I love (somebody). j^ -6un -iiyun thou lovest. -&it -aid he loves. -cak -I'lyong we (1.3) love. -eak -ayung we (1.2) love. -eaig -ayaig ye love. -ait-wow (def.time) -dwod they love. -aitch-ik (indef.time) -didj-ig they love. Inverse. Sdke-h-ik-(5w-edn Sdhe-h-igoo-yon (that) they (somebody) j love me. -h-ik-6w-eun -h-igoo-yun they love thee. -h-eet -h.(nd he is loved. -h-ik-6we-ak -h-igoo-yong they love us (1.3) -h-ik-owe-ak -h-igoo-yung they love us (1.2) -h-ik-6we-dig -h-igoo-ydig they love you. -h-6et-w6w -h-ind-wdh they are loved. \ Indefinite Object Indie. Mood. Direct. (Conjug. 3.) Ne sdke-(t)ch-egdn Ne sdhge-ch-egd I love. Ke sdke-ch-egdn Ke sdhge-ch-egd thou lovest. Sdke-ch-cgdyoo Sdhge-ch-egd he loves. .3) •2) \ THE CREE LANGUAGE. 227 Ne sAke-ch-egsiii-nan Nin sdhge-ch-egd-min we (1.3) love. Ke sAke-ch-egan-anow Ke sdhge-ch-egd-min we (1.2) love. Ke s&ke-ch-eg&n-owuw Ke sahge-ch-egA-m ye love. Sdke-ch-egdy-wiik Sdhge-ch-egd-wug they love. Sake-(t)ch-eg-e -6un -&\t -6kk -6&k -caig ?UNCTIVE Mood. Saf: ^t)ch-eg-dy6n (that) ' ' #c (something) -dyun thou lovest. -aid he loves. -ay6ng we (1.3) love, -dyung we (1.2) love, -dydig ye love. -dit-w6w (def.time) -dwod they love. S-e-dke(t)chegdi(t)chik S-ahy-dhge-(t)ch-eg-di(d)j-ig they love. Tlie Inverse or return form of this (Indefinite) mode of the verb constitutes the Participial Passive, as follows. Participial Passive. Past Participle, (p. Ill et seq.) Indicative Mood. (Conjug. 4.) Ne sdke-ch-eg-ks-oon Nin sdhge-ch-egdhz I am loved (Lat. amatus sum). Ke sake-ch-eg-as-oon Ke sdhgc-ch-egdhz thou art loved. Sdke- ch-eg-as-oo Sdhge-ch-egdhzoo he is loved. Ne sdke-ch-eg-ks-oon-nan Nin sdhgcch-egdhzoo-min we (1.3) are loved. Ke sdke-ch-eg-as-oon qnow Ke sdhge-ch-egdhzoo-min we (1.2) are loved. Ke sdke-ch-eg-as-oon-ow6w Ke sdhge-ch-egdhz6o-m ye are loved. Sdke-ch-eg-as-oo-wug S4hge-ch-egdhzoo-wug they are loved. Inanimate, (p. Ill et seq.) Sake-ch-eg^tdyoo Sdhge-ch-egahd& it is loved. -egati'iy-wa -wun they are loved. q2 £-ZXS A GRAMMAR OF Subjunctive Mood. Sdke-ch-eg-ilsoo-yAn Sibge -ch-egdhzoo-yon (that) I am loved -yiin -yun thou art loved. -t -d he is lovetl. -yiMt -yong we ( 1.3) are loved -yiik -yung we (1.2) are loved -y^i'g -ydig ye are loved. -t-wow -w(kl they are loved. INANIMATE. Sake-ch-egiUriik SCihge. ch-cghlid -dig (that) it is loved -ee -in they are loved Paraoraph v. Verbal Adjective Active. (Intrans. Conjiig. 1.) Ne sake-h-ewsiy-wiss-m Nc sahge-h-ewd-wiz &c. / am loving, affectionate. Passive, (id.) Ne sake-h-ik-oos-z/t Ne sahge-h-lkoos. &c. f am lov-able, &c. Subjunctive. Cid.) Act. Sdke-h-eway-wiss-ert'n Siihge-h-ewa-wiz-eyo«. &c. (that) I am loving, &c. Pass. Sake-h-ikoos-e<(H. Sahge-h-6g-oos-eyo«. &c. (that) / am ami-able, &c. (See pp. 114, 115.) Paragraph VI. Reflective, Reciprocal, Simulative, Verbs, (p. 82 et seq.) These modes of the Verb involving to some extent (as respects Agent and Patient) the character of Transitives, are nevertheless conjugated as Intransitivcs (of the 4-th Conjugation). Indicative Mood. Reflect. Ne suke-h-issoov (or -h-ittissoon) Nin sahge-h-cdis J love mtisclf. THE CUBE LANGUAGE. 229 red. ired. ved. •ved. >ved. \ Uceip. A^C8dke-h-ittoonN(m(pliir.) Nin 8uhge-h-6dc-7Ni>i. We (l.'i) love each uthcr. Siinul. A^^ siike-k-asoo« (reflect.) Nin siihgc-kas. / make myself, pretend, to love. Subjunctive Mood. Reflect. SAkc-h-issoo-yiJM Siihge-h-^desoo-yrfw. (that) / love myself. Hecip. S;'ike-h-ittoo-y^JA (plu*"-) Sahge-h-^de-yo/fg. (that) tvc (1.3) love one another. Siuuil. Siike-k-i'isoo-yrtM (reflect.) Sahge-k-asoo-yrfn. (tiiat) / pretend to love. 11.5.) eq.) pects Lelcss KS PAnAOIlAIMI V^II. The OuLiQUE Cases, p. 117 et seq. Notes 64. 65. From the Transitive Verb in its Direct Relation (Nomin. and Acciis.) we proceed to the Oblique Cases ; namely, 1, Dative; 2, Ablative ; and 3, Accessory or Possessive ; beginning here with the last. It is, as already observed, used in connexion with the third person only. See Syntax. Possessive, &c. Case. (p. 123.) Anim. Ne sake-h-im-6w-a I love his him. Inan. 1. Ne sake-t-it-wan. I love his it. 2. Net' It-^the-t-um-wan. I think his it. Indicative Mood (anim.). Ne sdke-h-i/H-ow-a Ke sdke-h-i?M-6vv-a Stike-h-(//A-u-a Ne sake-h-e/«-innan &c. Direct, 3d person Accus. I love his him, or them, thou lovest his him. he loves his him. we (1.3) love his him. Sake-h-J7n-uk Silkc-h-jwj-i'il Subjunctive Mood. (that) I love his him, &c. thou lovest his him. 230 A GRAMMAR OF S)ike ^thu& I think his it. thou thinkest his it. he thinks his it. Net' It-6the-tum-w-dn-nan we (1-3) think his it. &c. Subjunctive Mood. 1. 8&ke-tA-tv-iik (that) I love his it. &c. 2. It-^the-t-um-n;-uk I think his it. &c. See Addenda. Paragraph VIII. Dative Case. (p. 117 et seq. Note 64.) Anim. Sdke-t-ow-ayoo he loveth him for him. Inan. Sake-t-um-ow-dyoo he loveth it for him. Direct. Anim. Indie. 3d Pers. Accus. Ne sdke-t-ow-6w I love (him) for him. Ke sake-t-ow-f/w thou lovest (him) for him. TIIK CKEE LANGUAGE. 231 •nda. Inverse, 3d Pera. Nomin. (p. 55.) Ne siike-tw-ftk he loves (him) for mc. Ke sake-tw-ftk Sake-tw-Ak Ne 8Ake-tw-4k-oonim &c. Direct. Ke 8ake-tw-6win Ke sdke-tw-owin-nan Ke sake-tw-('iwin-owow Inverse Ke sake-tw'-atin Ke sake-tw-atin-owow Ke sake-tw-atin-nan he loves (hiiti) for thee. he is loved for him, by &c. def, he loves him for us (1.3) 2d and 1st Pars. thou lovest him for me. thou lovest him for us (1.3) ye love hi»u for me. (p. .'i5.) I love him for thee. I love him for you. we (1.3) love him for thee. Subjunctive Direct. 3d. Pers. Accus. Sake-tw-6w-uk Sake-tw-6w-ut &c. (that) I love (him) for him. thou lovest (him) for him. Inverse. (that) he loves him for ine. he loves him for thee. he is loved for him,by,&c. dek. he loves him for us (13). S&ke-tw-ow-it Sake- tw- ask Sake-tw-&koot Sake-tw-6w-eamdet &c. Direct. 2d and 1st Pers. Sake-tw-6w-eun (that) thou love him for me. ye love him for me. Inverse. (that) I love him for thee. I love him for you. we (1.3) love him for thee S4ke-tw-owe-aig S^ke-tw-a-tan Sake-twa-tiik-ook Sake-twa-tak Indeterminate. Inverse, (p. 226.) Anim. Ne sake-/w-dk-6win they (some one) love him for me. &c. Inan. Ne sake-/«/«-ak-6win they (id) love it for me. 232 A GRAMMAR OF Anim. Ne tem ne nu-fw-&k-6win. . tny horse they (indet.) fetch (Aim) for me. Inan. Ne m^koman ne n&-tum-iik-6w\n. . my knife they (id.) fetch (it) for me. Subjunctive, (p. 226.) Anim. Sake-tw-iik-ow-ean (that) they (indet.) love him for me. &c. Inan. S4ke-tum>ak-nw-edti they (id.) love it for me. Sec. Paragraph IX. Inanimate. (Indie.) Ne s&ke'tAm-otv-div I love it for him. &c. Inverse, (p. 55.) Ne sdke-tum-^k he loves it for me. &c. 2d and 1st Pers. Direct. Ke sdke-t-um-6win thou lovest it for me. Ke sake-t-um-6win-nan thou lovest it for us (1.3). Ke sake-t-um-6win-ow6w ye love it for me. Inverse. Ke sdke-t-um-&tin Ke sake-t-um-atin-nan Ke 8ake-t-um-&tin-ow6w (p. 55.) I love it for thee, we (1 .3) love it for thee. I love it for you. Subjunctive. Direct, (p. 215.) Sake-tum-ow-uk (that) I love it for him. S&ke-tum-ow-iit thou lovest it for him. S4ke-tum-6w-it Sdke-tum-ask Sake-tum-4koot Sake-tum>6w>eam^et Inverse. (that) he loves it for me. he loves it for thee. it is loved for him, by &c. def. he loves it for us (1.3) \ (him) fetch ►r me. DEF. THE CREE LANOUAGK. 233 2(1 and Ist Pers. Direct, (p. 21<).) S<'ikc-tiim-<'>w-ciin (that) thou love it for me. &c. * Inverse, (p. 220.) Sake-tum-a-tiin (that") I love it for thee. Sakt'-tiun-ii-trik-ook I love it for you. Sdke-tum-k-tak we (l.'i) love it for thee. Paraoraph X. Dative and Possessive Cases combined. Anim. Ne sdke-tw-(im-ovv-tl I love hia him for him. &c. Inan. Ne sdke-tuni-iim-ow.ft I love his it for him. &c. Anim. Oo t6m& ne na-TW-am-6wft . . his horse / fetch (his him) fob him. Oot* ustis-Hne na-TW-a»i-6w& .. At5 gloves I fetch (id.)FORhiin. Inan. Oo muskesin-^ ne nd-TUM-am-6w&. . his shoes I fetch (his it) FOR him. Paragraph XI. Aniiii. Inan. Reflective, &c. Conjug. 4. I>i(fic. Mood. Ne sdke-Zn'-dssoon / love j't'i *) Jor myself. &c. Ne siike-/«»H-^ssoon I love (it) for myself. &c. Vnim. Inan. Subjunctive, S^ike-tw-assc.'-ydn (that) 1 love (him) for myself. Sake-tw-^ss6o-yun thou, &c. &c. Si'ike-tum-^ssoo-yUn (that) I love (it) for myself. 234 A GRAMMAR OF Paragraph XII. Ablative or Instrumental Case. p. 121. (Conjug. 3.) Ne sdke-ch-ega-grtw / love with, or of] something. Ke sake-ch-egd-g«w thou lovest with something. &c. Anim. Inan. Ne sahge-h- Ke s^hge-h- Oo sahge-h- Ne sdhge-h- Ke sahge-h' Ke sahge-h- Oo sdhge-h- Subjunctive. Si\ke-ch-egil-ge«M (g hard) (that) I love with, or of, some- Ac. thing. Sect. V. NEGATIVE VERBS. (See p. 63 et seq.) Ne sAhge-k-dh-se I love him not. 1 . Ne s&hge-t-(J0-seen I love it not. 2. Nind en-ain-d-ah-seeu I think it not. Indicative Mood. Present. Direct. 3d. Pers. Accus. I love him not (plur. them). thou lovest hira not. he loves him not. we (1.3) love him not. we (1.2) love him not. ye love him not. they love him not. •dk-se (plur. -g) •ah-se (-g) ah-seen •ah-se-non {-ig) ■dh-se-non (-ig) ah-se-wah (-g) •&h-se-w6n Inverse. See p. 214. Ne sahge-h-ig-oose (plur. -g) me loveth-/ie-not, i.e. he loveth me not (and so of the rest), he loveth thee not. he is loved not by him, her, (or them) def. he loves us (1.3) not (plur. they). he loves us (1.2) not (»/.). -ig-oosen-ahwah (-a) he loves you not. (id). ■ig-oosc-w6n they arc loved not l>y, ivc, pef. Ke sahge-h- Oo sahge-h- Ne sahge-h- Ke sahge-h. Ke sahge-h- Oo 3ahgc-h- igoose i-g) ig-oo-seen (-mh) ig-oose-non i-ig) ig-oose-non (-ig) THE CREE LANGUAGE. 235 3.) hing. iig. 2d and 1st Pers. Dirfct. Ke s^hge-h-^se thou lovest me-not. Ke s4hge-h-es6e-m ye love me-not. Ke sahge-h-ese-min thou or ye love us (1.3) not. some- thing. Ke sdhge-h-esenoon Ke s^hge-h-^senoon-im Inverse. I love thee not. I love you not. Subjunctive Mood. Present. Direct. Sahge-h-4h-se-wug(plur.-wflA)"9(that) I love him not (plur. them) Sahge-h-ah-se-wud {-wah) Sahge-h-ah-s-ig Sahge-h-(lh-se-wong-id {-Kah) Sahge-h-ah-se-wung {-tvah) Sahge-h-dh-se-waig {-rvah) Sahge-h-4h-s-ig-wdh » -se-w6d f thou lovest him not. he loves him not. we (1.3) love him not. we (1.2) love him not. ye love him not. they love him not. Inverse. S4hge-h-6sig (plur. -wflA)''*" (that) he loves me not. Sahge-h-esen-ik he loves thee not. Sahge-h-egoo-sig he is not loved (by, &c. def.) veth est). (or xi/). 139 xix. 4. M^k-ahmahwdh-se-iwfjr . . (that) / find not to, " in," him. ix. 31. Noondahwah-s-i^r . . (that) he heareth him, or them, not. vii. 35. Che mekahw&h-se-WMW<; . . (that) we (1.2) find him not. vii. 45. Ke benkh-se-wdig . . (that) ye have not brought him. ix. 30. Kekdnetn&h-se-w(^t^ . . (that) ye know him not. XV. 21. Kekanemah-se-woc{ . . (as) they know him, or them, not. 'le. 3). THK CUBE LANGUAGE. 239 Chapter II. Sect. ADVERBS Note, ch is pnniounccd Oi' Time Present. An-nooch, at present. Kk'wii, now, inslimtli/. Kc'.siirli, fliis instant, immediately. Ktiseskow, the present opportunity. Past. URp'in, ayo. I'spee, ttum, when. A'Htum-ispcc, .lince. A'wooH-ia|)cc, before. Annooch-egdy, very lately. K'yas, kydhtee, long ago. Weskuch, formerly. ShiiHhi, already. Ootilkoos-iiik, yesterday. A'woos-ootfikoosaik, the day be- fore yesterday. I-awooa-ootukoosaik, two days be- fore yesterday. l'ci)t)on-ook, last winter. Nc|)in-ook, last summer. Future. Etap, afterwards. PAtoos, hereafter. Ptltima, by and bye. Cheskwa, presently. Pu-cheskwa, id. with emphasis. Kekuek, some time or other. KoygS, at length. Weykach, at n future time. (Cree). as tch, aiul J as dj. IVpook-c, when it shall {be) winter, next winter. Wtlppi\k-e, tomorrow. A'wooHc-wtlppiik-e, the day ijfter tomorrow. Wc'puch, soon. Nummil cskwa, not yet. Ok Time Unsfecikieu. Is-peeae, whilst. MooRuk, always. Ask'ow, sometimes, frequently. l-dskow, unfrequently, rarely. NcgootoonegS, seldom. Kinwais, ybr a long time. Nuggisk, for a sfiort time, tempo- rarily. Kissik./or a very short time. Mcthugas, a long time ago. Pitta, /or a instant. Kok'ekay, every moment, oh every occasion. Oot'che, ever. NummS ootche, never. Maikwauj, at the same time (or place) . VVeekee, usually. Scmmkk, at once, without delay. Ketahtowiiith, all on a sudden. Thiskunnel „ , ^.cthroughtheday Kuppfiy J {all day long. (I'spee, time.) Ecco-spee, that very time. 240 A GRAMMAR OF (Is-pdeche, space, quantity) Tan-ispeeche ? how far, &c..*' TAn-ispee, when {past)f TAn-ithekdk, id. (fut.) ? Tiln-ispee 6oche, what-time from, how long? Ee-^yowee, continually. Oosk'uch, at first. Eskwiach, the last. Am6ya, m/wais, before. Mustum, m\vy'stu8, after. Of Place. (Itte, place.) T&n-itte ? what place ? where f O-te, here. Ne-t^, iin'-te, there. Ecco-t^, that very place! 0-tS-6oche, here-from, hence. N^-t& ooche, therefrom, thence. Ch^eke, nigh, close to, Kisshewauk, near. W&thow, afar off. O'pemay, on one side. Utte, from-wards. Pey-, Peyche, hitherward. T^n-te it-&ike, on which side. O-tfe it-aike, on the hither side. Kwisk-ittfe, on the other, reverse, side. Nubbutt^, on one side. I'-eetow, on both sides. Astum-itt6, on this side. Awoos-itte, on the other side, be- yond. Nigootchis, inland. Nantow, somewhere. Missheway, every where. Moocheek, on the ground. Espim-ik, on high. Of Quantity and Numbeu. Appeiiis, little. Mistabay, a great deal. Tick-uk, tks whole {number) . Atteet, part, some (id.). Missheway, the whole (quantity). Ptlke, part, some (id.), Kegat, almost Kokethow, all, Kickee, among. Ni-ee, exactly. Ni-ithekok, exact quantity or number. Kesdstow, middling, moderately. A'woos-ithekok, more. A'stum-ithekok, less. Uthew&k, exceeding, very. Notfe, short qf. Uthew&k-eputhu, it exceeds. Not^-puthu, it falls short, (p. 146) Nummah mw^see, not much. Eg'ah-waudj, scarcely, hardly. Op Quality and Manner. Tkbiskooch alike, Petoos, different. Kwiusk, strait. Pimmich, crosswise. Sugge, thick, close together. I-aspees, thin, far between. Mahmow,aW together, collectively. Piskis, apart, separately. Mummain, here and there one. Menab, again, anotha: Naspich, very. Soke, extremely. Ketwom, over again. Nisscek, softly. Peykach, slowly. \ £lt. 'y). or ly. 146) ely. THE CREE LANGUAGE. 241 S^eak-aitb, kindly. Pw&stoway, lingering, slowly. Pidtucky car^ully. Puk-kkum, very steadily, atten- tively. Kithippee, quickly. Sissekootz, suddenly, abruptly. Mooche, openly, gratis. Saik-aith, of one's own accord. Ma-mdicli, (from muche, bad, 'tgly, iVc.) badly, wickedly. Skkooch, positively, inevitably. Kemooch, privately, secretly. Mahmuskdch, wonderfully. Pississik, alone, unaccompanied. Nasp&ch, wrong, mistakingly. A'thimach, difficultly. Mana, seemingly, N^spitche, finally. Ket^towaith, all at once, suddenly. Oom'isse, this wise, thus. O'te, to wit. Piko, only, nothing but. Mow-utche, collectively. Wussuswy, dispersedly. Of Comparison, Now-uch, inclining to, rather. Kesastow, moderately, middling. Mistahay, greatly, a great deal. Naspich, very. Ath'ew&k, exceedingly. Soke, very greatly. Weysah, very. Weysah fithew&k, extremely. Oosam, too, most. Numma mwdsee, not much. Met6onee, perfectly, completely. E-ap-itch, the same. P^toos, different. Mwooyche, exactly. Of Affirmation. Tkpwooy, truly. Chek&ymS, to be sure, certainly. Ethinnuttok, in reality. S^koo-ch, positive-ly. W^ychetowee, completely, thO' roughly. Ethepenay, really. Of Negation. NummS, no, no^ Used with Indie. Numma wetha, id. stronger, id. E'gah, not. Used with Subj. and Imperat. Niimma-nisse, (soft neg.) no. Nummd-nta, (^strong neg.) no. Numma w&watch, not at all. Eck'wiss^, forbear. Eck'wisae egah (stronger neg.) id. do not. Pick6onaiii, trifling, "nonsense," (also Intensive) indefinitely. Of Doubt and Uncertainty. W^eskowinl • , r . . ~,^ „, > Angl. I dont know. Tane-piko I Mdskooch, perhaps. KIstenach, perhaps. E'tooke, I suppose. Mdna, apparently, seemingly. Meeskow, by chance, accidentally. U'tchethow, in'vain, uselessly. Of Interrogation. K^kwan? what? Ch6i \ , -J , J > Interrog. Particles. Tan' itt& ? which place ? 'where ? Tail' itte ootche } from which place? whence ? Tin' isse ? which wise, how ? Tcin' tato ? which number, how many P 11 242 A GRAMMAU OF Sect. II. CONJUNCTIONS. 1. Copulative. — M6n\i, and, again : Assitchc, a/«o ; Wftwauj, likewise. 2. Disjunctive. — Mogga, A«/; E'gah, or. 3. Conditional. — Kt'espin, if; E'gah, unless. 4. Adveksative. — Miiggah, but; A'che, else; A'cW-kay, Missow-uj, so much the more. 5. Concessive. 6. Causal Kw&y- A'ta, indeed, although ; E'thewa'ik, nevertht kootow, however, nevertheless. Ooiche, from, because, by reason of. Final — Kutche that, to the end that. 7. Conclusive. — E'cco-isse, thus, therefore ; Weche, whence ; Mh,for. TAsepwa, no wonder. Tuckoow&j, so much the more. Teakwuch, coM^rnry to expectation. Eeakum, why. Egfl mk, for (e.g. I did) not. Pussena, Mutway, A'tsi, (with Indie.) indeed; {with subj.) although. TJntowduj, Vfkvries, a fortiori. expressions of doubt. Eccose (Ekin), thus, so, (it is). Mogga (pos.) and; (privat.) but. Miistum, after that. Mooyais, before that, ^uttucka, fortunately. Peetow, "i expressions Nuppiiit, > of Nuppwowis, / dissappointment. Tapean, it is a chance if. E'ga, (with subj.) unless. H^, as (Fr. comme). Sect. III. PREPOSITIONS. P^tkche, in, within. Wuskitch, on the outside. Espim-ik, on high. Chuppasees, below. Tahkootch, t^tche, upon. Uttdhmik, underneath. S^pah, under. Ath^eoo, beyond. S&hpoo, through. Wdskali, around. Wannuskootch, at the end, extre- mity. Ch(?eke, close, very nigh to. I'ssee, towards. Pooskoo kcsik, the same day. P6osi]ioo\vutchee-k,onthesamehill. Assetche, backwards. Take (maiskunnow), all along (the path). Utte, fromward. THE CREB LANGUAGE. 243 Ikewise. !OW-UJ, Kwky- O'oche, FROM, qf, with, by means of. Kithekow, Kickee, among. Tustowidj, between. (Tdbbeskooch, alike, equal.) Tibbeskooch, opposite Peethis, until, unto. Pdssich, (passing) over. Awkw&, at the back qf, behind. Sissoonay, parallel to. A'stum-ik, in the front. A'b-im-ik, at the back, behind. A'bbetow, (half) in the middle. Note. — The Preposition governs its Noun, generally, in the Locative Case, pp. 184, 185. Wtfor. t is). t.) but. ment. extre- ly. imehill. ng (the Sect. IV. INTERJECTIONS, Ah ! express, of assent. Ah ! Ah ! yes. O ! O ! O ! Angl. I thank you. Eh ! Ch^ ! express, of surprize and disappointmenlt. I! ah! id. Hi ! express, of pleasure, Tfi-taich, expressive of contempt, Angl. tush! Waw? Angl. Eh? Kaw ! indeed .' Y6 ho ! Angl. what now ! How ! come ! now ! How! untowaudj, well! then. Ek'wa! now! Chist! look! Fo'otee! lo! behold. A'ttat^pun ! Angl. / am glad of it! Ek'weaJlne ! Angl. that's right ! Ath'is I alas ! there is no help for it ! M^eakw&ra ! mind ! Pickoonat^! nothing! " nonsense" \ Soke ! very ! strong ! stoutly ! Mfltee ! let tis see ! PcegJltch ! slowly ! R 2 Peeatuk! carefully! Nissik! sqftly! Pif.tkne I would that .... ! TApwooy! verily, in truth / A'stum ! hither (come) '• A'woos ! away (go) ! Tan-ek-6otee ! what of that ■' Tkn-eke-moggil ! and what then! Pap^y way ! good luck ! Happwo Kptha ! it rests with you^ as you (thou) please ! Keysa Ke'ysa 6tee! it is well 'tis no worse! Keeam ! ah-keeam ! be it so! G&unekS t^pwooy ! (ironically) yes, 1 dare say ! Kwachist ! awkw&chist ! express, of wonder or astonishment. Tipwooy-gunne ! seriously ! with- out joking ! Esk'wft ! presently I E''g& isse ! dont ! Ecco ! just (so) I (Fr. voila) 244 A GRAMMAR OK PART III. SYNTAX. Chap. I. The Parts of Speecli are Seven, viz. 1. Noun; Pronoun; Verb, including the Accid. and Particip. Passives ; declinable. 2. Adverb; Conjunction; Preposition; Interjec- tion ; indeclma,ble. i."* Construction the rules of Concord and Govern- ment are observed as in European languages. Sect. I. OF THE NOUN. The Idiom of this Language, as seen in its declinable forms, divides the Noun into two classes, (analogous to those of gender,) which we have denominated the Animate and Inanimate. Their respective plurals are formed — the former by -tik or -wuk (Chip. -g, -ttg, or -tvug) — the latter by -3 or -nti (Chip, -m, -un, or -nun) added to the Singular, (p. 181.) g^" But when governed by a verb in the third person (expressed or understood), the Noun ends — the Anim. in -« or -rva (sing, and plur.) Chip, -n, -un, or -wun — the Inan. in -ethii sing. -Mu-fi plur. Chip, -eneh sing, -inervun plur. Vide Trans. Verb. JVo^e. — ^The (Pronominal) equivalents of their Cases will be found in the Verbal Affix. See pp. 55, 183. THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 245 The Element me- (and w- or we-) prefixed to certain nouns, has, from the manner of the latter's uniting with the PosseMs. Pron. been considered by some writers as equivalent to the European Article. This is, however, a mistake, ttince it is found only in the names of the body and its parts, as W/'Ow, the body, Ne dw, my body ; Me-tdon, the mouth, Ne tdon, my mouth ; Me-sit, the foot, Ne sit, my foot ; &c. — and in those expres- sing Relationship, iis, Me-gduwee, a mother, Ne yduwee, my mother ; &c. — with a very few others, as, Me-wtit, a b. ,^, Ne wut, my bag; 1V-^effee, a dwelling or habitation, NVeyee, my dwelling. Two Nouns coming together, one of wh'ch is in the posses- sive case, are expressed as folU)\vs, (See Possess. Pron. p. Ne poosis oo thnia-u . . .m^ son his daughter ; Angl. mi/ son'* daughter. A'f gnosis 00 tm\ii-u.,.thy son's daughter. Oo gnosis oo th\is-('lhu-a...his son's daughter. Ethinu 00 guosi.s-a...the Indian his (or her) son, Angl. the Indian's son. Ethinu 00 goosisu oo t^ni8-^/Au-u...the Indian'* son'* daugh- ter. Eskwdyoo oo ti!lnis-a...the woman her daughter, Angl. the woman's daughter. Eskvviyoo oo tunis-i oo tdm-^thu-a...the woman her daugh- ter, her (access.) dog. Angl. the woman's daughter's dog. * Vide infra. Sect. II. OF THE ADJECTIVE. The European Adjective, as expressed in the Algonquin dialects, is, in its most simple form, a Verb (Intrans). p. 25. Sect. Ill, OF THE PRONOUN. The Personal Pronoun has three persons in the singular and four in the plural. (See pp. 51, QO, 185.) Indet. Owe-iik, some-body any body. Indef. Kektv-an, some-thing, any thing. 246 A URAMMAK OK The third perHoii sing. fVt'tho, in the same in both •' gendern." Their Cases will be found in the verbal Affix. Note. — ^The Personal Pronoun is exprcssetl in thret, ways. 1, Unab- breviated, as— when in AppoHition. nn Oiv.i wethu (aniin.) this (is) ho j Ooma weiha unan.) this (is) it ; Nelha wetlut I it, i.e. it (is) I, (see p. '254 Of the Verb-Substantive) j or— when useil absolutfly, as in answer to a Question ; or, — for the sake of Hin))hasiM, as, Nc ijn si'i-hw(i/ snow-shoe-f. Net' aasdiu-eni}n-\ik...our (1.3) Hnow-shoe-f. Ne paskesiggun-d (inun.)...m^ gunj. Ne p.'iskesigguii-cmm-fl.., owr (1.3) gun.r. Tlie Relative Possessive Pronoun agrees with its Subject in " gender" and number (id.), (p. 187,) Net' I'an owil (anini.)...nune (is) this. Angl. this (is) niinc. Net' I 'aii-»/* do-koo. . .mine (are) these. •»"«> •» ^f tiic rest. Net' I'an unn-&...niine (is) that. Net' I'an-u^ unn-c^ec.mine (are) those. Net' I'an oo-mi (inan.)... mine (is) this. Net' I'an-& oo-hoo...niine (are) these. A'iBt' I'an iinne-m&...mine (is) that. Net' I'an-a unne-hee...n)ine (are) those. The Demonstrative and Interrogailve Pronouns also agree with their Subject in gender and number, as, Ow& mistik (anim.). ..this tree. O'okoo mistik- wiik... these trees. U'nn& e8kwayoo...that woman. U'nnekee esk way wuk... those women. Oom'a muskesin (inan.)... this shoe. O'ohoo miiskesin-&... these shoes. THE CKRK LANGUAGE. 247 Uiiiiemit ni6iiktiii)un...that knife. ' Uniiclicv inr)ok()iuati otiier fndian. KootiK'k-uk r'Uliiiiu-uk...tl><> other Indiuns. Kuotuc'k pewApiHk (inan.)...tlu> other iiieta!. Kootuck-ii i)ewA{)iHk-wii...tlie other nietaU. Ovv'enu kd'tha?...who (art) tliou ? Owiriekee kt-tha-wow-.-who (are) ye? Ow'una unna Ethitni .''...who (is) that Indian ? Owinekec nnnekee Ethinu-uk .'...who (are) those Indians.^ Kckwaii uinieina .''... what (is) tliat (thin^) .'' Kukwanee unnehee ?...what (arc) tho.se (things) } (p^ The Demons. Pronouns, when governed by a verb in the third person, change (in like maimer with the Noun, vide supra) the above (aniin.) forms into the Inan. ouhee and linnec or unnehec. (Chip. oonootvh, enetvh. (p. 2.'i().) The (indeclinable) Pronoun Relative g(\ (Chip, kah or gah, Jones) implies, and stands for, its Antecedent; and when there is no other nominative, the verb agrees with it accord- ingly, in (the implied) " gender," number, and person. It governs the Subjunctive Mood. (Ital, c7** V. 30. O'onesheshin (adj. verb) iiiii depahkoonewa-wtn . . it is good, " just," my judgment. viii. 14. Tipwii-raahgud (neut.) nin teb^hjemoo-ain. . it is true. . . . my rela-^ioH, " record." are -a... THK CREE LANGUAGE. 251 Both Nouns (see above), and Pronouns (Demonstrative and Interrogative), when in the Nominative Case, require the verb in the third person. Metho-siss?/ (adj. verb anim.) owa...this is good. ]Meth6-siss-((-HA' ookoo... these are good. Metho-wassin (id. inan.) <')oma...this is good. M(!thovvassin-w^7...6ohoo.. .these are good. Kinwoo-su 6wa iskwayoo (aiiini. )...*/(« (or he) is long, tall, this M'oman. Kinwoosu-uk ookoo iskwiiy-wnk ....they are tall, these women. Kinw-ovv ooma mookoman (iuan.)...it is long, this knife. Kinw6w-a 6ohoom6okoinan-ii...tliey are long, these knives. So also in the Subjunctive. — he klnw-oosiV owa iskwiiyoo (anini.)...as she (or he) is tall, tiiis woman. — ho kinwoosit»«ow (def.) or -hr kinwoositchi'A; (indef. time) ()okoo iskwiiywuk...as they are tall, these women. — he kinw-ak oonia niookoman (inan.).. as it is long this knife. — he kinw-ak-wow (def.) or, -hekii: wak-ec (indef.) ('>ohoom6koman-ii ...as they are long, these knives. In a simple sentence the (verbal) A^trbutive commonly precedes its Subject, as above, unless ai Fniphasis on the latter require the contrary order. As the English Adjective, and present an I i)ist Participles, are, in these dialects, expressed by a person)' vcrh, it results (and it is deserving of attention) that the ^ 'trit)uti\e, ui... -? when compounded with its Subject, is ever in ilie predicailve form ; .so not only in " the man is good," but also in " the good," " rhe ;ood. v. 2S. P^-tahgweHhin-6omahgut(id.)ewhk(v,hig. . it is hither-arriving the (lay. viii. 16. Tab quiyukw-dind«7i,(7W«rf (p. '2i3) nin tebahkoonew.i win. . it will be strait-think-able, " true," my judgment. i. 5. Ewh (dush) wahsayahze-win ke zahgrt/j^j-mahgud (a cid.pass.) . . that light is broke forth. Sec pp. 25 et seq. 3ti. 252 A UUAMMAR OF living," " the loved man," &c- there is a (aubordinate) verbal asaertion expressed, (p. 248.) MOODS. The Indicative and Imperative moods are used absolutely — the Subjunctive and Doubtful (dub.) subordinately or depen- dently. Indicative and Impkuative Moods. Ne git nifii'lu's-oon...! will cat. It'-akwMM ^skootiiyoo niogga nippee nunniifi 't-akw?i«... there is fire but water there ix not. A'tt6et t("t-iippii-KX-, iitteet nioost-ootriy-B)«A.. part (of them) they upon-sit, i.e. ride ; part they go on foot. Kuttawassis-M (intrans.) Iskwayoo, ethewaik ni'imma ne siike-h-oH' (trans.) the Woman is handsome, never- theless / love her not. O'tii dppcc.sit thou here. Unte it-6otai-A;...go-ye thitlier. M(3chesoo (pres) m6ches(')o-kun (indef. tense)... eat thou. Woputch peye'ie-k<'>way-k«t/; (indef.)... soon hither-return- ee, " come back" ye. Subjunctive Mood. But if two Verbs are joined by a relational, or a dependent conjunctive v/ord, as the Pron. Relot. or certain Conjunctions, the latter or dependeut verb is governed in a subordinate Mood — if it be declarative, in the Subjunctive — if contingent or doubtful, in the Doubtful Mood. A^e kiskissirt (indie.)., he ke itw-ain (subj.).../ remember tliat / have said so. Ne kiskissiH he tbot-tifc...I remember that he did it. Ne kissewdssiw h6 il-wa-nik...! am angry that thei/ {Fr. on) say so. Sashi ne gil ke issebwooyta'w peyche-kewi ««*•,../ shall have departeil when you hither-return. Ke metoon-in he N6hetha\V('M?i...^//oM perfect-est when thou Cnee-e.st, talkest Cree. THE CUBE LANGUAGE. 253 '. on) M6tho-wAs8-in kuttn p6ydk6o-^Hn...t< is good that thou be one, i.e. be ulone> P6egee8k^tik-wun(p. 1 14)h(i nipptV...tt is regret-ible, inelan<< choly, that he is dead. The Infinitive is resolved into the Subjunctive. Nieet6w«n kiitta \t-^H)tedn...it is inconvenient that / (for me to) go thither. W^yt«n ki4ta toochegi\t empl;atic. 254 A ORAMMAK OF Before \vc quit tlie Intrnnsitive Verb, it may not be super- fluous to remark briefly on tlie Verl)-Sul>stnntive. OK THR VKRH-SIMJSTANTIVK. The Verb-Substantive is expressive of Existence, simply, or witlioiit reference to manner of Being ; so, 1. It is not Auxiliary ; its place in the I'-nglish phrase being supplied by the verbal InHection. (See pp. 1<)8. 1<)}).) 2. Nor is it Copulative ; so it is omitted between words in Apposition; as, 1, O'wena Ki'thn ?...who (art) thou ? 2. A'^'ootowee-fflw kctlia...ujir (1.3; father (jirt) ihou. S. Ne moukouian lunna ..viij knife tliis ; this (is) my kmiV. Again, Wetha ga too-t-ak...(it is) Ac,' who has done-»7. Ni'i/ia, ga U'n>t-ti7HiH(iii...f (it was), wiio di'l {-!-) it. JVi'lha-wow,^h ti'iot-ak-/7 ...///e-jebah-u'in kiya ewh pemahteze-wiw. . I (am) the resurrec/jon and the life, xiv. 6. AVp» . . ewh mekuii, kiya ewh tapwii-jdn, kiya ewh pemah- tezr-inn , , I laiii) the path, and the Xxwth, and the life. II Tllli ( HKIi l,AN(U/A(JE. 255 2. A^e siggetlifiysin-«rt« ho oot»)wee-m-erf^...»?'e (!.S) nre glad that thou tuthen'Ht-«.v, art oiir father. 3. Ne ki8k6thetf'« lir oo-iiHJokoini'ui-fJMM (poHS.) noma.../ know that thou own-knife-cst (poss. j). 141) this."7 The elementary verb net' Aw-iw (p. !.'>.'>) is, however, for the sake of Emphasis, often used in the Iiulieative or absolutely.'*** Where tliers is no verbal form the Assertion eonsists in, or is supplied by, the stress on the leading or the (sniphatic word. ^ect. V. OF THE TRANSITIVE VERB. The Intransitive verb, in its most sirn[)Ie form, contains, as we liave seen, only one person, ^'iz. its Subject, analogous to the European verb. The Tran. .cive verb comprizes two (or more) — subject and ol)je(;t, i»/c I'xi/iee inahegf^uii-./. Tlii'if will kill t/icxe w<»lvi'-.v. INVRII8E. Ke ga ii\p\r.i-\x-i7i-oonritv-uk dokoo inali(.'gguii-uA. Tfin/ will kill n.\ (I. '2), these wolve-.v. Hut v\" h 3d persoU) Kuttii nippa-li-;7i-«)M/- tio/ire nialieggun-//. T/iPi/ will he kill-a/ f>i/ these wolve-.s. The A!)lative sign, Mchc, is often used with its regimen, e.g. after the I'articipial Passive, as, Ke (auxil.) nippa-che-gas«o (')otche in(')okoman.../it' has been killed by, or with, a knife. The verb agrees with its Subject and Object, expressed at understood, in " gender," as well as in number, and person ; us. Note. — In simple sentences the Objective noun commonly precedes, the Subject follows, the verb, unless Emphasis suggest a different order. Ni)t(i. — The Inanimate object has two conjugational endings of the verb, [see below 1 2.] as well as a Double Inanimate form. (p. 222.) Moostoos (anim.) «c k6 nippa-h-ow.. .bison /have kill(ed)- hhn, i.e. I iiave killed a bison. 1 Weeas (inan.) ne ke nippa-t-a«... flesh or meat / have killed-t7. Net' ustis (anim.) nc ga wi'inne-h-on'...7ny mitten / shall lose hitn. vi. 19. Oo ge wahbum-aAwow (dir.) enewh Jesus(«n).. they " saw" Jesus, iv. 28. Oowh ke endd (id.) enewh enenewun. . this he said (to) " the" men. vii. 1. Oo ge undahw-anc-m-iV/oon (inv.) enewh Jewyun che nes- €(jood (inv.) . . he was sought by the Jews, that he might be killed (by them def.) vii. 3. Eli«5wh wekuhnis-Hn oowh no ge 1koon (id.). . those his breth* ren this he was said ito) hy. I I '258 A CiKAMMAU Ol' 1 Ne niut(kc»iii (iuuii.) ne ga wunnt'-t-rt«...w^ -hoe / shall lose-iV. Maheggun (anim.) «i' g{)()s-t-ow...a wolf I i'mu-hivi, i.e. I fear a wolf. 2 Eskootayoo (inan.) tic gr)08-t-t'M,..fire / fear it. Mis-tilt fanini.) ti' (»otc-ii-ow...a stick, / take-Aiw. 2 Piiskt'sigKun (iiijin.) «V)()te-ii-c«...a gun, / take-i/. Ow'e-uk (anim.) nah Ke wappa-m-ow?...any one (dost) ihoH nae-him ? {nah, Interrog. part.) ii Kekwan (inan.) nah fee vnxppfi-t-cn ? something (do) Ihuu aee-il I Note. — It may l)c useful to observe that, among others, the Special Inanimates -h-um, -ta-h-Hw, -sl;-«m, Ike. (sov; p. 80 et seq.) helcmg to the 2d (Inan.) conjugation, throughout. Note. — In Cree, the Inanimate form of the verb remains the same for both numbers of the Object, i.e. sing, and plur. INVERSE. A*'*? gil nippa-h-j'^ maheggun (anini.) me will kill-Zie^ a, or, the wolf, i.e. the wolf will kill mc. Nc gii nippa-h-('^-oo« eskootayoo (inan.) ..it will kill me the fire. Ne weethippee-h-i'A-oo7» Missinna-h-^ggun-ap'pwooy (id.) it soils me (the) writing-linuor, or ink. DOUBLE INANIMATE, (p. 222.) ^ei(y\sage-t-hi-magun uskee, muskoosee-f<...j/ brings forth, produces, the earth, grass. Kissa-gumme-t-iunfljqfMM (p. 178) (Eskootayoo (inan.) nippee (inan.)... the fire warms the water. Seep. 131. The Transitive verb has, &c. A member, or part, of a sentence, whether standing as Nominative or Accusative, classes in Construction \N'ith In- animate Nouns, and the verbal inflection agrees with it accord- ingly, as, Weyt-«w kutche ioo-i-ummdn ,.it is easy that / (Angl. for me to) do it. THE CUEE LANUUAUE. 259 f -hoe / sluiU inw-him, i.e. I t. ■him. ce-i/. my one (dost) ling (do) thou era, the Special |.) helong to thf ins the same for 1 kill-/je, a, or, will kill me the p'pvvooy (id.) brings forthj (inan.) nippee standing as tion M-ith Tn- miti it accord- at / (Angl. for Ath'em-«'i kutche t6o-t-M;n»MKn.,.t7 is difficult that thou do «■/. Ne methu-ethe-t-e/i... kutche too-t>unimun.../ welUthink- it, approve-t/, that thou do it. iVc pMckwft-t-e/t kutche t6o-t-ak.../ hate-t/ that he do it. The Indefinite Transitives, -ewayoo and ^effuyoo, classing in form (p. 99 et seq.) and use as li' isitives, have p» nerally, like these, no Accusative noun (as ^ 'I love, intran.) ; the latter {-effuyoo) however admits l .uUcfinite (uninflected) Accusative, as, Moona-h-cg.lyoo uskee-pwow-tik...he digs potatoes, Angl. he is potatoe-digging. The Indefinite Transitives take the oblique Cases (p. 122). Note, — ^The latter (Inan.) is, as already observed, the more comprehen- sive of the above two forms, it being Universal — referring to persons as well as things, (p. 104. Note.) Lastly, our inflected verb, then, expresses its (pronominal) Subject and Object, both definitely and indefinitely, and in both (Anim. and Inan.) forms : ANIMATE. Suke-h-o^oo he loves-Aim. Siike-h-dganetvoo they (Fr. on) love-kim. Sake-h-en)(/yoo he loves (somebody). Skke-h-etvanen^oo (p. 98).) they (Fr. ow) love (somebody). Sdke-t-ow Sake-t-aHewoo Sake- (t)ch.-eg(iyoo Hike-ch-egiinetvoo See Accidence. INANIMATE. he loves-i/. they (Fr. on) love-t7. he loves (something). they (Fr. on) love (something). tt seems worthy of remark, that the Indefinite Personal Pronoun, so imperfectly seen in European tongues, is, in these dialects, distinctly 'wrought out, and placed on a footing with the Definite Pronouns, /, thou, &c. It is further interesting to observe that the Cree (and Chippeway) Indians can, in hke manner with Europeans, be Gbneral or Parti- s2 till IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) k ^O ^.^ ^ A m & -% 1.0 1.1 u US "^ lis IIIIIM 1.8 1.25 1 1.4 1 1.6 ^ 6" ► Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WSBSTER.N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 /a I' 1! 11 il il I 260 A GRAMMAR OF CULAR (as regards the meaning of the terms which they use) according as the Subjects and Objects occurring in their discourse may recjuire. The Accidental and Participial Passives class, in all respects, with the Intransitive Verb. ■jl 1'AUAGU;^PH II. Of the Modus, (p. 252.) Tlie Indicative and tlie Subjunctive Moods are alike Declarative — but arc used in the relations of Principal and Subordinate — absolute and dependent. The former is used as follows, A^e ke nugge-skorv-div k'ootkv/ee...! have met thy father. Ne ke nattoo-t-ow-dw (p. 96) ke giiuwee.../ have listened t6 her, thy mother. Moosuk ne nugga-t-iX" ne goosis.., always ffjy son leaves me. Ne ke wyaise-h-ik ne st6.\s.,.my (eldest) brother has deceived me. Ke ^ake-h-ik, ke gooat-ik m6gga...he loves thee, he fears thee also ; he loves and fears thee. The latter, as well as the Doubtful (see below) is used when dependent on another verb, expressed or implied, as, Ke ga xneeth-ittin ti,/pahuni6w-CKH-c.../ will give it to thee when thoH (balancest it to,) payest, me, Ne n6-ethe-t-en he Tpeyt-nmmdn ...I am content, pleased, that / (to) hear it. Ni'imma kekwan ne meeth-ow he keetim-i< (intran.) ...not any thing / give him as he is lazy. Ne peekeskache-h-j'A'-oon kemmew-//A-e (flat vow.) ...it depresses me when (ever) it rains. Ne kusk-ethetiime-h-ik-oon he kimmew-6k...it impatient- eth me as it rains. Nippee s6ege-n-rt/j ooth6ggun-i^...(some) water pour-/Ao«- it into the dish. THE CREE LANGUAGE. 261 1 1 s) according re({uire. 11 respects, are alike icipal and ler is used 'ly father, ive listened leaves me. las deceived le fears thee used when IS, i^e it to thee \t, pleased, )...notany vow.) ...it impatieiit- pour-/Aott- M^eth-t^ attik-wy()f kutta Muskesinna-kaitch-t/f . ... give (thou) them deer-skin^, that they shoe-make, make (some) shoes. , ^ Suppositive and Doubtful, (pp. 205. 206.) The Suppositive (Indie.) form is used absolutely — the Doubtful, relatively or dependently. Nippd-took^-rat'Ar (intran.)...Me^ sleep I suppose. I'-esk-oot^y-took^-ntA (.u\.),..they are tired (with walking) I suppose. Sdhke-h-dy-tooke-nJA (trans.)... they love Ihem I suppose. SAhke-h-ikoo-tooke-wiA (id. mv.)...they are loved by (them) I iuppose. ISO Doubtful. Kuckwayche-m-iX- kutta it-6otiiy-n'^/A:-n>^...ask {thou) them if they go or not. Niimma ne kisk-ethe-t-eH ittfe ga a.th-dy-tvdk'tve...I do not know (it) the place where they may have laid him. Keespin sake-h-^-w-Mn-e...if thou love me. Tan etethe.ra-t'-w-MM-fe...whatever thou mayest think (of) me. Keespin untow-6the-m-e-w-rfjg-wfe...if^e seek me.'*' The Subordinate (subj.) may precede the Principal (indie.) verb in a sentence (vide supra), Tuckoos-aiTre ne ga wappa-m-ow...wAcM he arrives / shall see him. '6" xi. 13. Nebah-doogan-UM (suppos.). . he sleeps (to them) I suppose. '*' XX. 15. K^shpin , weendahm&hwesAin d^be ke &hsah'\v-ahd(,ud) -ain . . if , tell thou me where tfiou hast laid him. XX. 2. 13. Kah (neg.) ne kek^indah-ze-en (neg.) debe ke ahs&h-w- ahg (dg)-wkin. . I know not where they have laid him. xiv. 15. Keshpin sahge-h-e-w-ai^r-wain . . if ye love me. xviii. 8. Keshpin lindaw-ane-m-e-wat^r-wain . . if ye seek me. XV. 20. Keshpin ke koodiihge-h-i's'-ooitiaA^f-wain , i*" they have per- secuted me. xi. 12. Keshpin neb-ahy-wain . .\i he sleep. 262 A GRAMMAR OF f I! ii K^ oose-ltvdw-euti'e (dat.) ke ali tippa-hum-a/t».. when Ihou host made it Jitr me I will pay thee. , * Ke 6ose-t-^/(ch)e ne gfl m6th-t^...when he shall have made it he will give (it to) me. The Indicative Mood, also, as of the Intransitives, may be changed into the Subjunctive. Ke 6oae-twdw-eun-e 6kwa ke tippa-hura-cU(£n...when thou shalt have made iljbr me then will pay-thee-I. K6 uose-t-a7che 6kvf&. k6 meeth-i/...when he shall have made it then will give (it)-Ae-me. The Infinitive Mood is resolved into the Subjunctive with the Conjunction Ae, as (Fr. comme), when ; or kuttd or kutche, that (Fr. qtie), as, Ne p^y-tow-dw hfe I4m-i7.../ hear him as, or when, he speaks ; Arigl. / hear him speak. Ne wappa-m-ou hh too-t-ak..,l see him as he does it; Angl. / see him do it. Ne ge tt-ik-rfB»t« kutta nigga-moo-^dn.../Aey have desired me (Fr. on m'a dit) that / (Angl. to) si'sg. Ne k6 it-ik-dtvin kutche m6eih-uk,..I was told (Fr. on m'a dit) that / (Angl. to) give (it) to him. (ttissaw-(/yoo... kutche t6o-t'ak,..he sends him that Ae (Angl. to) do it. Paragraph III. OF THE PASSIVE VERB. We have seen that Attributive words or (in Indian) verbs of a Passive signification, are found in both the Transitive and the Intransitive forms. As respects the Transitive verb, which includes both Sub- ject and Regimen, the Passive is found in the (Inverse forms of the) double-third persons only, the other combinations of THE CREE LANGUAGE. 263 on ma the pers. pron. having all an Active signification (See pp. 106 ot seq. 255 and Accidence). In simple sentences, the Active or Passive form may be used; generally, as in other languages, together with its noun in the appropriate Case (pp. 244. 247). (Dir.) S&ke-h-o^oo Eskw&y-oo ix\omm.),..she loves him, the wo- man, (nom.) Sake-h-oyoo Eskw^y-wd (accus.)...Ae loves {her) the wo- man, (accus.) (Inv.) Sdke-h-tA; Eskwdy-oo (nom.). ..she is loved by him, the wo- man, (nom.) Sdke-h-iA E8kway-»i'« (ablat.).../te is loved by, the woman. The Indeterminate, &c. verb (p. 225) takes no noun after it in regimen. But, in Construction, the forms of the verb and the signi- fication, &c. of its pronominal elements, sometimes impose a certain manner or order of expression, which gives to the Indian what may be called a Phraseology of his own. We particularly allude here to the frequent use of the Passive Voice, in the place of the Active as it is commonly employed in European tongues, and which is therefore an occasion of much perplexity to European (oral) learners. In English we may say, actively, " she loves him because he be- friends her" — " he knows that she hates him," and the meaning is clear and precise ; but if changing, simply, e.g. the femin. into the mascul. pronouns, we say, in the same reciprocated sense, " he loves him because he befriends him" — "he knows that he hates him," the meaning is ambiguous — may be misunderstood : we rather, in such cases, would say " he loves hiin, because he (pass.) is be- friended by him" — " he knows that he is hated by him," &c. Just so it is in the Indian language. The above, and similar examples, for want of the sexual distinctions of the personal pronouns, must in Cree, &c. be always expressed as in the latter sentences, that is, by giving the inverted or return meaning of the subordinate verb, in the Inverse or Passive (instead of the Active) voice. [See 11 i 264 A GRAMMAR OP p. 57 et seq. and Note 34, the Examples (*) of which should be compared with the context of the English (active) Originals.] The above Examples must be resolved thus, S&ke-h-ayoo (dir.) (Eskwdy-oo) ootche h6 kittemkk-ethe- m-ik-oot (inv.). She loves him (the woman) because that she is befriendet/ by him. Kisk-uthe-t-Ji»w (dir.) he puckwik-t-i^-()o/ (inv.). He knows that he is haterf by (him or her, understood). Direct. " God is the father of those whom he loves." K^che-m&nneto ootawee-?/?-a_yoo linnehee ga s^ike-h-a^. God (Ae)*father-e//t {theni) those whom he loves {them). Inversely. " God is the father of those who love him." (act.) K^che-manneto ootiiwe-m-n^yoo unnehee g.\ skVe-h-ikool. (pass.) God fathfer-eth those whom he is loverf by. " He protects those that fear him." (act.) Kunnaw-6the-ni-fl?yoo unnehee gk g6ost-ik-dot (pass.) He protects those whom he is feared fty.''^ This Idiom, or Inverse mode of Expression, may be further exemplified in pli rases of another kind, where the distinction IM iv. 50. " He believed the word that Jesus had spoken (act.) unto him." Oo ge tapway-aind-on ewh ekedoowin kali egood (pass.) Je- sus (an). He believed the M'ord wbich he was said to by Jesus. iv. 51. ' As he was going down, his servants met (act.) him and told (act.) him," &c. Magwah 6.\ine-givfaid oo ge nahqua-shk-a'A^-oon (pass.). . oo b6hmet^hgun-un, oo ge weendah-m-aA^'-ooB (pass.) Hush. As he was returning he was met by (pass.) . . his si-ivants, he W9S told by {them) (pass.) also. THK CUEE LANQUAGK. 265 between Agent and Patient is less obvious, and whir h are also in English expressed Actively, thus, " (Dir.) Whom does Ae love? ow-ethuu a&ke-h-ayoo? (indie.)... i.e. whom love-eth-Ae {.him) ? The converse or return form is, (Inv.) Who loves him? ow-(^lhiid stike-h-JA- ? (id.)...i.e. whowi t* he loved htf ? These and similar sentences, from their usual places in discourse, are more commonly expressed in the subjunctive, thus, (Dir.) Whom does he love? oviethua he sake-h-o< ? ...i.e. whom (is it) that he loves (him) ? (Inv.) W7io loves him ? owethuu h6 s(ike-h-ikoot?...\.e. whom (is it) that he is \o\ed by ? (Dir.) Whom has he given it (to)? owethu^ he meeth-a/ ?...i.e. whom (is it) that he has given it (to him) ? (Inv.) Who gave it (to) him? owethua he m6eth-ikoot ?...i.e. whom (is it) that he has been given (to) by ? The Intransitive Passives, namely, the Participial, the Ac- cidental, and the " Adjective" Passives (p. 114) are used as other Intransitives. The Particip. Passive may take a Noun of the Instrument, &c. after it, with the ablative sign ootche, of, from, with, &c. Tato-pitch-eg«/-rt»yt>o net' uckiiop dolche cheesta-ask-wan. // is tor-n or ren-< mij cloak by a piercing-iron, i.e. a nail. Paragraph IV. OK THE POSSESSIVE OR ACCESSOllY CASE. Having noticed, in the preceding pages, the verbal Root in combination with the Cases (of the Pronoun) direct and oblique, corresponding with the same relations (under other forms) in European languages, we now proceed to the Pos- sessive or Accessory Case, which being of an anomalous 266 A GRAMMAR OK I < character, becomes one of the leading difficulties of the Algonquin dialects, and therefore demands particular atten- tion. This case we call Possessive, because it is always used when in con> nexion with a Noun preceded by the Possessive Pronoun of the 3d pers. 00 or oot\ Angl. Am, {her, or their) — Accessory, when the same relationa' sign has a more extended meaning, implying simply " in relation to him, &c." This additional oblique case (p. 123 et seq.) refers exclu- sively to a 3d pers. as the *' Rnd,'^ and signifies or implies, generally, " his" or, "in relation to him {her, or them)." It is indicated, in its simple form, by the element ethit, and may be superadded to the other (verbal) Cases. To have a clear view of this subject, wo must refer to the two forms before giv^n, viz. — Intran. p. I99. Net' I'-an, &c. and p. 209. Net' V-&-tv.dn, Sec. Trans, p. 213. Ne sdke-h-ow, &c. and p. 229. Ne sCtke-h-im-uw-d, &c. together with their respective subjunctives — and in both " genders." The former of these two forms I shall call the Absolute — the latter, the Relative form. Ex. Intransitive (Indie). Absol. Unte i-dtv ne, or ke, gnosis... there is he my, or thy, son; my or thy son is there. But with an access. .3d pers. Relat. Unte i-dthu 00 g6osis<6f... there is-he- (relat. to him) his son; Angl. his son is there. Subjunctive. Absol. Tan-itt6 i-dt (subj.) ne or ke guosis ? Unte i-6w (Indie.)... where is-Ae my or thy son .'' There he is. Relat. Tan-itt6 i-dth-it (id.) 00 g6osis-a } Unte i-dthu (id.)... where is-Ae (to him) his son } There he is {to him). Inanimate. (Indie.) Absol. Untfe T-ow ptiskesiggun... there is (-I'O the gun. Relat. Untfe i-dlhu pHskesiggun... there is (it, to him) the gun. THE CRRE LANGUAGE. 267 Absol. Relat. Absol. Ilelat. Subjunctive. Absul. Tan-ittt! i-aJc p&skesiggun ?... where is (t/) the gun ? Relat. Tan-itt^ i-dth-ih pdskesiggun?... where is (to Aim) the gun P Transitive. (Indie.) Animate. Absol. Ne or Ke g6oa\a ne wftppa-in-o» (p. 213) my or thy son.../ see him ; I sec my, or thy, son. Relat. Oo goosis-u ne wftppa-m-tm-owd (p. 229). ..his son / see hix him, I see his son. Inanimate, (pp. 222. 2.30.) Ne or Ke m6okoman ne ke wunne-t-«n (Ist conj.)...f»y or thy knife, / have lost (it), I have lost my, &c. knife. Oo miiokoman ne ke vf(inne-i-a-n)dH...his knife / have lost {it " to him.") Ne or Ke in6okoman ne ke 6ote-n-en (2d conj.)...OTy or thy knife / have taken (t7). Oo inuokoman ne ke 6ote-n-um-W{?n (id.). ..his knife / have taken it, (relat. " to him"). So in the Subjunctive. Animate. Absol- Ne or ke guosis he wilp'pa-m-MA...wiy or thy son as / see him. Ilelat. Oo goosis-a he vfd.p'pa-m-im-uk...his son as / see ihis) him. Inanimate. Absol. Ne or Ke mckikonian he ke w-uk...his knife as /have lost (it) " to him." Angl. id. Absol. Ne or Ke mookoman he ke (io\,e-n-ummdn.,.my or thy knife as / have taken (it). Angl. having taken. Relat. Oo mookoman he 6oXA-n-dm-tvuk...his knife as / have taken (it " to him")^ii3 So also in the Imperative, as^ IS3 vi. 42 6o8-un, kiyaoo-g^e-n k&k&ne-m-iM-itn^-oo^ ?. . his father, and his mother (that) know-Hi8-we-/Aem.^ that we know (.his) them. XV. 10, Kah ^zhe minjerae-n-um-rfA-tt'-w^ finan.)- • as I have held " kept" them (relat, tn him). I I 268 A QRaMMAR of Animate. Absol. Oo-tt-N ne t)^pan-a8k...takc thou mtf sledge. Relat. Oo-tTn-tm oo ti\pHn-a8k-(wm...take thou (his) him, his sledge. luanirtiate. Absol. 0'o8e-t-(> nc iiippey win... make thou my bed. Relat. 0'oHe-t-a-u)(oo) (w-nippiiywiii-iwj...inake thou (his it) his bed. But this Relative form is not limited in its use to nouns having the Possessive prefix oo or ooV (.3d pers.); it is used also in its Accessory character, referring simply to an ante- cedent (or Principal) 3d person. When the discourse is continued concerning the same (3d) person which the sentence began with, the absolute form is proper, as, 1 P6etook-fl/yoo A he awkoos-i< A... Ac (A) comes in as he (A) 'is sick. 2 Wi'ithilw -fl_yoo B he we m6ch-e/ B ... he (B) goes out as he wants to liunt. But when another person is introduced into the sentence, in the same relation, the Relative form is used, distinguishing the Accessory from the Principal agent, &c. (see Mavor's Eton Lat. Gram. The Construction of Pronouns, Note) as, 1 Peetook-ayoo A he iiwkoosi-M-i7 B.../t' ouwftsS' iin-is-(> (accu8.)'--I have seen (hi.s him, JIfc.) as Ihey came in (rel. to him) his children. Wappa-m-r/yoo A (nomin ) liwn (accus.) he pinimittissaw- dl Mooswft ....A saw B as he (A) followed (him,) a Moose. Wappa-ra-ayoo A (nomin.) Bwrt (accus.) he pimmittissJiw- dth-it Moo8wa.../